GAS STATION INFORMATION
D Fuel selection:
Select unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved
vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher is recommended.
D Fuel tank capacity:
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.)
D Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W−30
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp. qt.)
Drain and refill
With filter
4.7 (5.0, 4.1)
Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
See page 312 for detailed information.
D Engine coolant:
Capacity: 9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.2 lmp. qt.)
Coolant type − “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or
equivalent
With ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 315.
D Automatic transaxle:
Fluid type − Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV
See page 319 for detailed information.
D Tire information:
See pages 324 through 331 for detailed information.
D Tire pressure:
Tire size: P215/60R16 94V
Tire pressure:
Front 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi)
Rear 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (99 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 40
kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi) to the front tires and rear tires,
but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know−how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can
enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction.
Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance 1−800−25−LEXUS (Toll−Free)
(1−800−255−3987)
D HAWAII:
Lexus Customer Service Assistance
1−800−25−LEXUS (Toll−Free)
(1−800−255−3987)
CANADIAN OWNERS
D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service
1−800−26−LEXUS (Toll−Free)
(1−800−265−3987)
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
i
INTRODUCTION
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty
D Others
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing
Equipment Standard.
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
ii
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non−genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two−way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, SRS airbag
system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 2 − AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 − STARTING AND DRIVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this section, and remember − drive safely!
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
SECTION 4 − IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 1 − INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SECTION 5 − MAINTENANCE
BASIC OPERATION − QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
1. Keys and doors
SECTION 6 − SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
2. Switches
3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
4. Interior equipment
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
5. Exterior equipment
6. Comfort adjustment
7. Theft deterrent
iii
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INDEX
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
Safety symbol
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”.
iv
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL
v
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
16
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
17
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 160
18
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1
Door lock switch and power window
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 40
2
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 102
4
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
19
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5
Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
20
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 227
6
Headlight, turn signal and
fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30, 33, 34
21
Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
22
Electronic modulated suspension
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
23
Traction control system off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 238
24
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
25
Power adjustable pedals switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
26
Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
27
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
28
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
29
Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
30
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7
Multi−information display control switches . . . . 59
8
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
9
Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
11
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
13
Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 196
14
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 53
15
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 156
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
vi
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in U. S. A.)
vii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
14
2
Traction control system off indicator light . . . . 238
15
Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3
Vehicle skid control system/traction control
system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
17
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 33
19
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
20
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
21
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 54
8
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
22
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240
23
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 55
10
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
24
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
25
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
11
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
26
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
12
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 227
27
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
13
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
28
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
viii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in Canada)
ix
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
14
2
Traction control system off indicator light . . . . 238
15
Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3
Vehicle skid control system/traction control
system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
17
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
18
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 33
19
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
20
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
21
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 54
8
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
22
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240
23
Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 55
10
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
24
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
25
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
11
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
26
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
12
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 227
27
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
13
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
28
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
x
PICTORIAL INDEX
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
Page
1
Tilt steering lock release
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2
Seat position, seat cushion
angle and height control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
3
Seatback angle control switch . . . 96
4
Lumbar support control switch . . 97
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
xi
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
Page
1
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 39
2
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 101
6
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30, 350
9
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
10
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 34, 348
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
xii
PICTORIAL INDEX
xiii
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Quick reference
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
5
6
1
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
2. TILT STEERING WHEEL
Seat position
Seat cushion
angle
Seat cushion
height
Seatback
angle
Lumbar
support
Head restraint
height
Head restraint
angle
2
To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle:
1. Pull the lever up while holding the steering wheel.
2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle.
3. Release the lever.
QUICK REFERENCE
3. POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
To adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position with the
automatic transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
3. Push the “ ” side of the switch to move the pedals to the
front most position.
4. Push the “ ” side of the switch to move the pedals
toward you until you can fully depress the brake pedal.
5. After adjusting, depress the pedals a few times to get
used to the feel.
3
QUICK REFERENCE
4. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
BE056
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
position
BE057
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (shifting into
overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking (shifting into
overdrive not possible)
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking
K Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition
switch must be in the “ON” position.)
NOTE: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 236.
4
QUICK REFERENCE
5. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
D HEADLIGHT SWITCH (U.S.A.)
With the ignition OFF
D HEADLIGHT SWITCH (Canada)
With the ignition OFF
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
BE004
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights also turn on.
Headlights also turn on.
Automatic light control
With the engine started and parking brake
released
Automatic light control
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights turn on at full
intensity.
With the engine started and parking brake
released
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights turn on at full
intensity.
BE004
Automatic light control
Daytime running light
system off
5
QUICK REFERENCE
D HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH
High beam
Headlight flasher
6. WIPER SWITCH
Intermittent operational type
Intermittent operation
D TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Low speed operation
Right or left turn
High speed operation
Lane change
(right or left)
Washer on
6
QUICK REFERENCE
Raindrop detection type
Automatic operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Washer on
7
QUICK REFERENCE
8
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
14
15
22
9
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using
valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.
The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the trunk
even with the trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box
turned off. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off
the trunk lid opener main switch and lock the glove box and
rear armrest door. To turn off the main switch in the glove box,
see page 85. For locking the glove box, see page 70. For
locking the rear armrest door, see page 99.
Since the doors can be locked without a key, you should
always carry the flat key or spare master key in case you
accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
1
Master keys (black) − These keys work in every lock.
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with
built−in transponder chip, your dealer will need it.
2
Sub key (gray) − This key will not open the glove box
and rear armrest door in the rear seat.
3
Key number plate − Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been
placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips
are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate
key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the
engine.
10
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
KEYS AND DOORS
Flat key
Starting the engine using a flat key
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start
the engine with this key.
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been
placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is needed to
enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to
lose this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not
be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend
that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not
leave it in your vehicle.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator
light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10
seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light
goes out. This means the engine immobiliser system is
automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobiliser
system” on page 14.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobiliser system if 10 seconds
have past after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove
the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the
step 2.
4. Start the engine within 20 seconds after the security
indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 20
seconds have past after the security indicator went off. You
need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try
it again from the step 2.
11
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
D Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate
may fall out or become bent also.
D The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So
do not use it regularly instead of other master keys.
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
D When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent
the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to
stop soon after it starts.
12
KEYS AND DOORS
D When starting the engine, do not use the key in
proximity with other transponder keys (including the
flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press
other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may
prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the
engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens,
remove the key once and then insert it again after
taking off other transponder keys (including the flat
key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while
gripping or covering them with your hand to start the
engine.
D Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
D Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material
that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
D Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other
objects.
D Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard and hood under the direct sunlight.
D Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
D Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic
materials.
13
KEYS AND DOORS
ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built−in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key. However, there is a limit to the number of
additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI−16BTY−B
MADE IN JAPAN
The engine immobiliser system is a theft prevention
system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic
code to the vehicle. The engine will start, only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light
flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
14
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in Canada
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL
This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
1
Locking the doors and sounding an alarm
2
Indicator light
3
Unlocking the trunk lid
4
Unlocking the doors
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and
surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes
once.
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary
with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote
control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
15
KEYS AND DOORS
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be
discharged. If this is a case, replace it using a special
screwdriver.
D The remote control does not work.
D The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
D The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come
on.
For the replacement of the battery, see “Replacing the battery”
on page 20. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See
“If you lose your keys or lock yourself out” on page 285.)
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same
vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
When you push the “LOCK” button on the key briefly, all
the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle.
At this time, one beep sounds and the turn signal lights flash
once.* However, when you push the “LOCK” button with any
door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.**
To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the
“UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch, locking
cannot be done.
Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.
Push the “LOCK” button once again.
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and the beep
volume can be changed.
** The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed
securely.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The wireless remote control key is an electronic
component. Observe the following instructions in order
not to cause damage to the key.
NOTICE
D Do not leave the wireless remote control key on places
where the temperature becomes high such as on the
dashboard.
Do not push the “LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3
seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.
For details, see page 18.
D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
D Avoid putting it in water.
16
Locking/Unlocking the doors
KEYS AND DOORS
When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3
seconds from the first push, all other doors are also
unlocked.*
NOTE:
* The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
At this time, two beeps sound and the turn signal lights flash
twice.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior
light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in
“DOOR” position.** However, this function does not work
when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For
further information, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 66.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push again.
" 1 Off
2 Louder
When you push any button on the key, the vehicle sounds one
beep when the doors are locked by remote control, and sounds
two beeps when the doors are unlocked.
You can adjust the beep loudness with the knob under the
instrument panel. Turning the knob clockwise increases the
volume and turning it counterclockwise until it stops turns the
buzzer off.
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and the beep
volume can be changed.
** The duration of lighting can be changed
*** The time before automatic re−locking can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
Unlocking the trunk lid
Sounding an alarm*
When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you
can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds.
When you push the “PANIC” button for about 2 to 3
seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE:
* The operation method can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
18
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE:
* The alarm can be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
Operating the side windows and moon roof
The side windows and moon roof can be opened using a
wireless key from outside the vehicle.*
NOTE:
* The windows and moon roof can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTICE:
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. When you release the button, the windows and
moon roof stop operating.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
19
KEYS AND DOORS
D Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
D Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
D Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV
technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
20
Replacing the battery
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken that small children do not
swallow the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
D When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components.
D Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
D Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
KEYS AND DOORS
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the
arrow direction.
3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module.
4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with
the positive side up.
NOTICE
D Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery should be faced correctly.
D Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
D Do not touch or move any components inside of the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
D Be careful not to bend the electrode of the battery
insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
D Take care not to lose the screws.
21
KEYS AND DOORS
5. Install the lid with the 2 screws.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover
with the screw.
DOORS
Locking with key
7. When pushing any button on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
" 1 Lock
2 Unlock
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and
towards the back to unlock.
The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s
door. Turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all doors simultaneously.*
NOTE:
* The 2−step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate
inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves.
The windows and moon roof can be opened from outside the
vehicle using the key. For details, see page 42 and page 91.
22
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with inside lock button
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock
the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors
cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is
in the ignition.
If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side
impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, all
doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds.
CAUTION
" 1 Lock
2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.
It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while
driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with power door lock switch
If you do any of the following, no door can be unlocked with the
power door lock switch.
D Lock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control
when all the doors are closed.
D Open the driver’s door or front passenger’s door and move
the inside lock buttons of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the front doors.
The power door lock switch can be reset in the following ways.
D Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
D Unlock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control.
" 1 Lock
2 Unlock
To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door
lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the
rear side will unlock them.
The same switch is also located on the front passenger’s side.
24
D Unlock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door with the
inside lock button, and then unlock all the doors with the
power door lock switch.
KEYS AND DOORS
Setting the auto door locking and unlocking
functions
Setting the functions
You can set the following auto door locking and unlocking
functions.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
1. Close all the doors.
(a) Locking linked with the shift position
3. Within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position;
All the doors are locked automatically when the selector lever
is moved out of the “P” position with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position.*
D To set function (a)
Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5
seconds with the selector lever in the “P” position.
NOTE:
* This function is the default setting for new vehicles.
(b) Unlocking linked with the shift position
D To set function (b)
Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5
seconds with the selector lever in the “P” position.
All the doors are unlocked automatically when the selector
lever is moved to the “P” position with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position.
D To set function (c)
Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5
seconds with the selector lever in any position except “P”.
(c) Locking linked with the vehicle speed
D To set function (d)
Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5
seconds with the selector lever in any position except “P”.
All the doors are locked automatically when the vehicle speed
reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher. However, if any door is
unlocked during driving, this auto locking function will not
operate until the unlocked door is opened once.
(d) Unlocking linked with opening the driver’s door
All the doors are unlocked automatically when the driver’s door
is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned
from “ON” to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
All the doors are automatically lock and unlock when you
release the power door lock switch. This indicates that the
function is set. If all the doors do not lock and unlock, the time
the switch was held may have been too short or too long.
Perform the procedure over again starting from step 1.
If you want to cancel a function, repeat the procedure. Each
time you perform the procedure, the function is set or
cancelled.
25
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with rear door child−protector
" 1 Unlock
2 Lock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open from the inside. To do this,
move the lever to the lock position as shown on the label
next to the lever.
26
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch (U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight switch (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
30
33
34
34
39
40
43
44
27
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
(U.S.A.)
When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in
the instrument cluster.
With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case
that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when
the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking
lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we
recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second
clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial
is turned fully up.
“DRL OFF” position
“AUTO” position
The daytime running light (DRL) system does not work
when the knob is set in this position.
The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on
depending on the darkness of the surroundings when the
ignition key is in the “ON” position.*
For details, see the following “Daytime Running Light (DRL)
System”.
NOTE:
* The sensitivity of the automatic light control sensor can be
changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
To turn on the lights manually, twist the knob on the end
of the lever.
First clickstop: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
Second clickstop: Headlights also turn on.
28
SWITCHES
To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition key to the “ON”
position, or twist the knob on the end of lever to the “AUTO”
position and then twist the knob until the first or second
clickstop.
If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the knob
is in the “AUTO” or “DRL OFF” position.
Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the driver’s
side instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the knob is set in the “AUTO” position, the headlights
turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released
with the engine started. They will not go off until the ignition
switch is turned off.
The headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or
turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.
When the headlights are on, they automatically turn off about
30 seconds after any door or trunk lid is opened and closed
with the ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.*
If you want to turn off the lights immediately, push the “LOCK”
button on the wireless remote control key twice. The lights also
can be turned off immediately by pushing the “LOCK” button
on the wireless remote control key with all the doors locked and
the trunk lid closed.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
NOTE:
* The time before turning off the lights can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
NOTICE
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
To cancel the DRL system, twist the knob to the “DRL OFF”
position.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
29
SWITCHES
Automatic headlight leveling system
(vehicles with discharge headlight only)
Vehicle position changes according to loading condition,
passengers getting on and off, vehicle acceleration and
deceleration, etc. However, as the headlight beam level is
always maintained automatically by the system at the proper
level, your headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
If you replace the rear suspension and/or the vehicle height
changes, contact your Lexus dealer to check the automatic
headlight leveling system and headlight beam level.
30
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
(Canada)
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
NOTE:
* The sensitivity of the automatic light control sensor can be
changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
SWITCHES
With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case
that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when
the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking
lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we
recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second
clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately.
When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial
is turned fully up.
The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the driver’s
side instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the headlights are on, they automatically turn off about
30 seconds after any door or trunk lid is opened and closed
with the ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.*
If you want to turn off the lights immediately, push the “LOCK”
button on the wireless remote control key twice. The lights also
can be turned off immediately by pushing the “LOCK” button
on the wireless remote control key with all the doors locked and
the trunk lid closed.
NOTE:
* The time before turning off the lights can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
31
SWITCHES
To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition key to the “ON”
position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob
until the first or second clickstop.
Automatic headlight leveling system
(vehicles with discharge headlight only)
If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.
Daytime Running Light System
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking
brake is released with the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (“AUTO”), the
headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn
on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter,
the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning
off the other lights.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
32
Vehicle position changes according to loading condition,
passengers getting on and off, vehicle acceleration and
deceleration, etc. However, the headlight beam level is always
maintained automatically by the system at the proper level so
that your headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
If you replace the rear suspension and/or the vehicle height
changes, contact your Lexus dealer to check the automatic
headlight leveling system and headlight beam level.
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCH
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
The turn signal is self−cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
33
SWITCHES
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
Intermittent operation type
To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the “ON”
position. The fog lights come on only when the headlights
are on low beam.
Fog light indicator light in the instrument cluster will tell you that
the fog lights are on.
" 1 Interval adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“INT” position: Intermittent operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
34
SWITCHES
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that the washer nozzles
do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact
your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced.
The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position.
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times
after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF”
position.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with
a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 348.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
35
SWITCHES
Automatic operation
Raindrop detection type
The wiper speed is determined by the amount of raindrops
and sunlight detected by the automatic wiper control
sensor.
Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to
lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the
sensitivity.
" 1 Automatic control adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“AUTO” position: Automatic operation
The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above.
“LO” position: Low speed operation
Even if the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position, the system will
switch to intermittent operations in the following conditions:
“HI” position: High speed operation
D When the windshield gets extremely cold (at less than
–10_C or 14_F)
D When the system malfunctions
However, when the windshield gets extremely hot (at more
than 90_C or 194_F), the wipers do not operate even if the
wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position.
36
SWITCHES
When the ignition switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position, and then the ignition switch is turned on
again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops
are on the windshield.
In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to
the “AUTO” position again.
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the
wipers and windshield.
When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the
ignition switch on, the wipers could operate
automatically in the following cases:
D If you touch the upper center of the windshield
adjacent to the sensor.
D If you wipe the upper center of the windshield
(adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.
D If the windshield vibrates.
D If you touch the sensor.
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times
after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF”
position.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 348.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that the washer nozzles
do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact
your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper
control sensor when cleaning the inside of the
windshield.
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with
a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
37
SWITCHES
Shifting the windshield wiper position
* More than 10 cm (3.9 in.)
" 1 Rest position
2 Retracted position
The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are
turned off.
In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the
retracted position (position 2) to the rest position (position 1)
above the hood level.
D When cleaning the windshield
D When inspecting or replacing the wipers
D When the retraction may be obstructed by snow, etc., at the
bottom of the windshield
Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted
position.
38
SHIFTING TO THE REST POSITION
Hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade and
pull it upward for more than 10 cm (3.9 in.) along the
windshield glass with the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22
lbf).
NOTICE
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER
SWITCH
RETURNING TO THE RETRACTED POSITION
Push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade
downward.
NOTICE
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
To turn the electric rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger on, push the switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the
heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the surface. An indicator light is on when the defogger is
operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
39
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de−icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
" 1
2
3
4
For driver’s window
For front passenger’s window
For left rear window
For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the window
can be operated until a front door is opened (or for 43
seconds).
40
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
Operating the switch
To lower the window, push the switch halfway down. Pull
it up to raise the window. The window glass moves as long
as the switch is operated.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
"Indicator lights
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switches tell you which of the
switches can be operated.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in
the opposite direction and then release it.
41
SWITCHES
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
The windows can be opened using an ignition key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Jam protection function
During automatic raising operation or key off raising operation,
the window stops and is lowered if something gets caught
between the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.
After the doors are unlocked, the windows begin to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 19.
42
D Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes
the power windows, make sure he or she operates the
windows safely.
D When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
SWITCHES
D Never leave small children alone in the vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still inserted. They
could use the power window switches and get
trapped in a window. Unattended children can be
involved in serious accidents.
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
D Never try jamming any part of your body to make the
jam protection function work intentionally.
D The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window fully
closed.
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
ignition key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
43
SWITCHES
NOTICE
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
" 1 For driver’s seat
2 For front passenger’s seat
To turn on the seat heater, push the switch. At this time,
the indicator lamp comes on.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
Each time you push the switch, the mode changes in order
from the “HI” (high heating temperature) mode to “LO” (low
heating temperature) mode to off.
The seat heater automatically changes to off mode when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position again,
the seat heater remains off until the switch is pushed.
44
SWITCHES
CAUTION
NOTICE
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
D Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
D Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or handicapped persons
D When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
D Persons who have delicate skin
D Persons who are exhausted
D Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
45
SWITCHES
46
Finish
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder
indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
48
49
50
50
59
61
47
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
"Low fuel level warning light
The gauge is displayed when the ignition switch is on and
indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the
tank.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
48
"Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is on. The engine operating
temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine
load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
TACHOMETER
D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
D Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop−and−go traffic.
D Towing a trailer.
13E064
NOTICE
D Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
D Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 269.
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over−revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
49
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(a)
or
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, push the trip meter reset
knob briefly. Each time you push the knob, the mode
changes in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip
meter B, then back to the odometer.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
(indicator and buzzer)
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
50
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
(c)
(on the center console)
(d)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
(e)
Stop and check.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading,
push the knob and hold it. The same applies for the B trip
meter.
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(b)
"Trip meter reset knob
DO THIS.
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
DO THIS.
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(f)
Stop and check.
(l)
(g)
Add engine oil.
(m)
Add washer fluid.
(h)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(n)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(o)
Low fuel level
warning light
Fill up tank.
(j)
Close all doors.
(p)
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
(k)
Replace bulb.
(i)
or
51
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(a) Brake System Warning Light
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key
is in the “ON” position.
D When the parking brake is applied ...
This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is
released.
D When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following cases.
D The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
D The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned
on with the parking brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
52
CAUTION
If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
D The light does not turn off even after the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not work properly and
your stopping distance will become longer. Depress
the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an
immediate stop.
D The brake system warning light remains on together
with the “ABS” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will
fail but also the vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light and buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light stays on
and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the
reminder light flashes if a front passenger sits in the front
passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the
front passenger fastens the belt, the light keeps flashing.
If luggage load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built−in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure,
causing the reminder light to come on.
(d) SRS Warning Light
This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning
light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible
to service the vehicle.
D When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
light does not come on, remains on or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the driver and front
passenger airbags fail. If the light flashes, the side and curtain
shield airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners fail.
(e) Discharge Warning Light
This light warns that the battery is being discharged.
If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive
belt.
D If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the
battery properly.
D If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the
charging system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the
battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower,
radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or
repair shop.
53
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken
or loose.
(f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or
it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for
concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated
slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It
is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on − even
for one block. It may ruin the engine.
(g) Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This light warns that the engine oil level is too low. Add oil as
soon as possible. (For instructions, see “Checking the engine
oil level” on page 311.)
While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes
the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this light may
come on due to the movement of engine oil in the engine.
In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this light
may come on earlier than the specified service interval of the
scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is
consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance
interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed
information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page
309.)
NOTICE
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will
damage the engine.
(h) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while
driving, first check the followings.
54
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
D Loose fuel tank cap
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp will not go off even after the several trips, contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
D There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M)
programs” on page 293.
(i) “ABS” Warning Light
Vehicles without vehicle skid control system—
If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator
pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere
in your electronic throttle control system.
The light comes on with the ignition key turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system
malfunctions, the light comes on again.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
55
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Vehicles with vehicle skid control system—
The light comes on with the ignition key turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
56
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid
control system do not operate, but the brake system still
operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC”
warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not
pushed.
(k) Rear Light Failure Warning Light
(m) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at
the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the
tail lights are burned out.
This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes
nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more
stop lights are burned out.
(n) Automatic Headlight Leveling System
Warning Light (vehicles with discharge
headlight only)
(j) Open Door Warning Light
Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible.
(l) Vehicle Skid Control System/Traction
Control System Warning Light
This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere
in the automatic headlight leveling system.
If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or traction control system.
(o) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work.
However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the
driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driving.
57
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
How to check all the service reminder
indicators
(except the low fuel level warning light and low washer
fluid warning light):
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few
seconds.
or
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open the door.
w069
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
The following service reminder indicator goes off after 6
seconds.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
or
or
w069
58
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
MULTI−INFORMATION DISPLAY
The following information is displayed in the instrument
cluster when you push the “MODE” button with the
ignition switch turned on.
Each time you push the “MODE” button, the display
toggles through this information.
(1) Instantaneous fuel consumption
(2) Average fuel consumption
(3) Driving range
(4) Average vehicle speed
(5) Driving time
13E068
The displayed values in the multi−information display indicate
general driving conditions. Accuracy varies with driving habits
and road conditions.
When the ignition switch is on, the last previously used mode
displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
multi−information display, the display will automatically be set
to the initial mode.
When the instrument panel lights are turned on, the brightness
of the display will be reduced.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
59
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(1) Instantaneous fuel consumption
(“MPG” or “L/100km”)
(3) Driving range
(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”)
The instantaneous fuel consumption is calculated and
displayed based on distance and fuel consumption for 2
seconds with the engine running.
The distance the vehicle can travel with the remaining fuel
is calculated and displayed based on the quantity of
remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.
The displayed value is updated every 2 seconds.
The driving range display indicates the approximate distance
that you can drive until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is different
from the actual distance traveled.
Note that an accurate figure may not be shown in the following
cases.
D When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, the
display will indicate the extremely high fuel consumption.
D When the vehicle is driving down a long slope, applying the
engine brake, the display will indicate the extremely low fuel
consumption.
The calculation is reset when the ignition switch is turned off.
The displayed value is updated every time the fuel equivalent
for 1 mile or 1 km is consumed.
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset.
The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road
conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will
be longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the driving range will be
shorter.
(2) Average fuel consumption
(“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)
If the low fuel level warning light comes on, refuel even if the
display indicates that the vehicle can be driven further.
Average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on total driving distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.
(4) Average vehicle speed
(“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button.
Average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based
on total driving distance and total driving time with the
engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button.
60
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(5) Driving time
(“E/T”)
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
The elapsed time after the engine starts is displayed.
When the engine is started, driving time is counted from 0:00.
Up to 99:59 (99 hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed. When
the driving time exceeds 99:59, the counter returns to 0:00.
To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
turn the dial.
With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument
panel lights will not be reduced when the headlight switch is on.
If the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully down, the
foot lights will turn off.
61
Finish
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
62
Finish
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear electric sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
65
66
66
67
68
69
70
70
71
74
75
76
77
78
79
79
80
81
63
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
VANITY MIRRORS
To turn on the vanity light, slide the switch.
To use the vanity mirror, swing the sun visor down and
open the cover.
The vanity light switch has the following positions:
“ON”—Turns the light on when you swing down the sun visor.
However, if the visor has been slid out, the light may not come
on.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
64
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Sun visors
INTERIOR LIGHT
14E130
1
To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor
down.
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
2
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backward.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
The interior light switch has the following positions:
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of the doors is opened.
The light goes off when all the doors are closed. For details,
see “Illuminated entry system” on page 66.
65
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL LIGHTS
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
14E133
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
" 1
2
3
4
66
Ignition switch light
Interior light (with the “DOOR” position)
Door courtesy lights
Foot lights
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
All of the lights will come on when any of the doors are
opened.* After all the doors are closed, the lights remain
on for about 15 seconds before fading out.**
CLOCK
NOTE:
* The operating condition can be changed.
** The duration of lighting can be changed and only the foot
lights can be set not to come on.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
However, in the following cases, the lights go out immediately:
D All the doors are closed and the ignition key is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position. (The foot lights come on when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. See the following “Foot
lights”.)
D All the doors are locked.
When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously using either
the key or the wireless remote control, all of the lights will come
on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.
Foot lights
The foot lights also come on when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position with the selector lever in the “P” position. When
the selector lever is moved out of the “P” position, the foot lights
will be dimmed.*
NOTE:
* The foot lights can be set to turn off when the selector lever
is moved out of the “P” position.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition key at
the “ACC” or “ON” position. To reset the hour, press the
“H” button. To reset the minutes, press the “M” button.
To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the “:00”
button.
For example, if the “:00” button is pressed when the time is
between 9:30 − 9:59 or between 10:01 − 10:29, the time will
change to 10:00.
With the tail lights on, the brightness of the time indication will
be reduced.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully
down, the foot lights will turn off.
67
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressing on the snuffer
bridge to release the catch.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always completely close the
ashtray after use.
"Cigarette lighter and ashtray
To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against
the ashtray cover. Then when the ashtray opens out,
press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up,
it automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the
“ACC” position to use the lighter.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, push it back in completely.
To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.
68
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
POWER OUTLET
D Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or
short circuits.
The power outlet is designed for power supply for car
accessories.
The ignition key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for the
power outlet to be used.
NOTICE
D To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
69
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GLOVE BOX
REAR CONSOLE BOX
14E104
" 1 Unlock
2 Open
3 Lock
2 Console box
To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the
glove box door, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
To access the upper tray, push the lock release button and
raise the lid. To access the console box, pull up the lock
release lever and raise the lid.
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the
glove box door is open.
The rear console box light comes on when the tail lights are
turned on.
The trunk lid opener main switch is installed inside the glove
box. See page 85 for further information.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
70
" 1 Upper tray
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the rear console box closed
while driving.
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (HomeLink R Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLinkR and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
(a) Programming the HomeLinkR
The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLinkR during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to program.
2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLinkR.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink R in view while
programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand−held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLinkR button.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLinkR changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by pressing the newly
programmed button. If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
" 1 Indicator light 2 Buttons
The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can
store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLinkR, install a
new battery in the hand−held transmitter prior to programming.
71
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLinkR button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLinkR
button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does
open, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLinkR
button to program another device.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the garage
door up/down.
Programming a rolling code system
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLinkR
button to program another rolling code system.
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLinkR” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
Programming an entrance gate /
Programming all devices in the Canadian
market
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to
program.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink R in view while
programming.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLinkR button.
2. Place your hand−held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLinkR.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand−held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLinkR changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
72
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by pressing the newly
programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLinkR memory
(all three programs)
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLinkR
button to program another device.
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
Programming other devices
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLinkR memory.
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be erased, however, to
reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLinkR”.
(b) Operating the HomeLinkR
To operate the HomeLinkR, press the appropriate HomeLinkR
button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLinkR
indicator light should come on. The HomeLinkR continues to
send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is
pressed.
CAUTION
D When programming the HomeLinkR Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
D Do not use this HomeLinkR Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling
the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current
federal safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases risk of
serious injury or death.
73
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CUP HOLDERS
FCC ID: CB2V94800
CANADA: 1763 102 264
This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. WARNING: This
transmitter has been tested and complies with
FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the device.
"Front cup holder
To use the front cup holder, push the cup holder portion
of the rear console box.
74
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX
"Rear cup holder
To use the rear cup holder, pull down the armrest and open
the cover.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink−cans
securely.
CAUTION
D Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink−cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To use the overhead console box, push the lid.
CAUTION
D To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console
box closed while driving.
D As this box is designed for holding eyeglasses, do
not place any object heavier than approximately 60 g
(0.13 lb.) in it. Heavier objects may cause the box to
open and the contents to fly out resulting in injuries.
D To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
75
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
AUXILIARY BOXES
To use them, open as shown in the following illustrations.
"On the instrument panel
To remove the adapter tray inside of the box, pull it up.
76
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FLOOR MAT
14E116
"In the trunk
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are
designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with
locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
77
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GROCERY BAG HOOK
14E125
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
To use the grocery bag hook, push the lower portion of the
hook.
This hook is designed for hanging things like a grocery bag.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the hook, do not hang any object
heavier than approximately 3 kg (7 lb.) on it.
78
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COAT HOOKS
REAR ELECTRIC SUNSHADE
14E137
To use the coat hook, push the hook.
To raise the rear electric sunshade, push the switch. To
lower the sunshade, push the same switch again.
CAUTION
The sunshade works when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed object on
the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those
items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you
hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position
while the sunshade is raised, the sunshade will be
automatically lowered. To raise the sunshade, move the
selector lever out of “R” position and push the switch
again.
79
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
TIE−DOWN HOOKS
D Do not touch the brackets fastening the sunshade to
avoid injuring your fingers or hands.
D Do not put your fingers in the sunshade groove while
the sunshade is operating to avoid getting them
caught or injured by the runner.
14E092
NOTICE
D To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,
always operate the sunshade while the engine is
running.
D Observe the following to avoid damage and/or
malfunction:
Do not overload the sunshade motor and other parts
(for instance by pushing down on the sunshade
bracket while it is opening).
Do not place anything where they may hinder the
opening/closing of the sunshade.
Do not affix anything to the sunshade.
Clean the sunshade groove if there is any foreign
matter or dust on it.
Do not operate the rear electric sunshade repeatedly
for a long time as its motor may overheat.
80
To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as
shown above.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 81 for
precautions in loading luggage.
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
LUGGAGE STOWAGE
PRECAUTIONS
When stowing luggage or cargo in the vehicle, observe
the following:
NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity
weight specified on the tire pressure label.
D Put luggage or cargo in the trunk when at all possible. Be
sure all items are secured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as
far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
CAUTION
D Do not place anything on the package tray behind the
rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and
possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or an accident.
D Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument
panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of
view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s
control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure
the vehicle occupants.
81
Finish
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
82
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
85
87
90
83
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever
under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is securely locked.
Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while
driving and an accident may occur.
84
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TRUNK LID
Trunk lid opener
CAUTION
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only
keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Trunk lid opener main switch
To open the trunk lid, push the switch.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
The trunk lid can be unlocked using the wireless remote control
key. For details, see page 18.
" 1 Main switch
2 Operative
3 Inoperative
If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system,
turn off the main switch in the glove box. To turn it on,
push in the main switch.
85
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the trunk
even with the main switch in the glove box turned off. When
keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the main switch
and lock the glove box and rear armrest door. For locking the
glove box, see page 70. For locking the rear armrest door, see
page 99.
In case the opener is not actuated
2. Pull the loop of wire to unlock the trunk lid.
This is used in case the trunk lid cannot be unlocked due to a
discharged battery or other trouble.
1. Pull down the rear armrest and open the rear armrest
door.
86
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Internal trunk release handle
If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the
phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open
the trunk lid.
FUEL TANK CAP
This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of
your vehicle.
The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark) handle will continue
to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the
handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.
CAUTION
D Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep
away the vehicle keys out of children’s reaches.
D Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Unsupervised children may lock themselves in the
vehicle or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
87
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
1. To open the fuel filler door, push the switch.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
88
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap
counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point
1 ), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to
point 2 ). Pause slightly before removing it.
Although a click will be heard as you turn the cap to point 1 ,
it does not indicate that the cap can be removed.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you
hear one click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the
fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right, and
set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door.
D Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in case of an accident.
D Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
NOTICE
Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the cap
could be damaged or become hard to open.
D Apply force only in the turning direction to the cap.
Do not pull or pry it.
D Do not tighten the cap further after you hear one click
when installing.
89
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
MOON ROOF
In case the opener is not actuated
Remove the cover and pull up the manual lever in the
trunk.
" 1 Open
This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due
to a discharged battery or other trouble.
To slide open the moon roof, push the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof
will fully open. To stop partway, push the same side or
“TILT UP” side briefly.
2 Close
The sunshade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sunshade will be opened with
the moon roof.
To close the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP”
side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully close.
To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN”
side briefly.
90
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To slide open the tilted−up moon roof:
Push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side to tilt down the
moon roof. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the
same side again.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until
a front door is opened (or for 43 seconds).
To tilt up the slide−opened moon roof:
Push the switch on the “TILT UP” side to close the moon roof
fully. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the same
side again.
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
The moon roof can be opened using an ignition key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivate.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
" 1 Tilt down
2 Tilt up
To tilt up the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP”
side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt up.
To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN”
side briefly.
To tilt down the moon roof, push the switch on the “SLIDE
OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully
tilt down. To stop partway, push the same side or “TILT
UP” side briefly.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the “ON”
position.
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.
91
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
CAUTION
The moon roof also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 19.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Jam protection function
D While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
During closing operation, the moon roof stops and opens if
something gets caught into the roof opening.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these
cases, you should normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the switch on the
“TILT UP” side until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then
tilts down a little automatically.
Make sure that the moon roof opens and closes automatically.
If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Lexus dealer.
D Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe
to do so.
D Never leave small children alone in the vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still inserted. They
could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in
the roof opening. Unattended children can be
involved in serious accidents.
D Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
D Never try jamming any part of your body to make the
jam protection function work intentionally.
D The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof
fully closed.
92
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Comfort adjustment
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
93
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Seat adjustment precautions
Adjust the driver’s seat so that the foot pedals, steering wheel
and instrument panel controls are within easy reach of the
driver.
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front
passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
D Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or seriously injured.
D Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
D Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the front seats with the side airbags. Such changes
may disable the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious
injury. Consult your Lexus dealer if you insist on
modifications of this kind.
94
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
D Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger,
luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting front seats
" 1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and seat cushion
height control switch
2 Seatback angle control switch
3 Lumbar support control switch
Adjusting seat position
16E298
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
95
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting seatback angle
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a
collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in
a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the
passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the
seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.
96
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting lumbar support
(driver’s seat only)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Front seats
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
97
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Rear seats
D Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
D After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
D Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
D After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
98
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
TRUNK STORAGE EXTENSION
" 1 Lock
2 Unlock
3 Open
Pull down the center armrest in the rear seat. Push down
the handle and open the armrest door.
Access to the trunk can be prevented by locking the armrest
door with the master key.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering
wheel, pull up the lock release lever, tilt the steering wheel
to the desired angle and release the lever.
When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as
you release the lock release lever.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 81 for
precautions to observe in loading luggage.
CAUTION
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
Be sure to close the door when the trunk storage
extension is not in use. Luggage or cargo in the trunk
may be thrown into the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or crash resulting in injury.
D After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up
and down to make sure it is locked in position.
99
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
When you set your driving position:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most
position.
3. Adjust the seat position and steering wheel angle properly.
(See pages 95 and 99.)
4. Move the pedals toward you until you can fully depress the
brake pedal.
5. After adjusting, depress the pedals a few times to get used
to the feel.
To adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals,
push the switch.
CAUTION
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position with the automatic
transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
D Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while the
pedals are moving. It may cause racing of the engine
or sudden acceleration.
To move the pedals toward the front of the vehicle: Push the
“ ” side of the switch.
To move the pedals back toward you: Push the “ ” side of the
switch.
D Make sure that you can fully depress the brake pedal
before driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to
hold down the brake pedal firmly in an emergency
stop.
The accelerator and brake pedals will move simultaneously.
100
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window
and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 39.)
CAUTION
D Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
D Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch is on.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side. It is a
convex mirror with a curved surface. Any object seen in a
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in
a normal flat mirror.
When the inside rear view mirror darkens in AUTO mode, the
outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection
of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see
“Inside rear view mirror” on page 103.
101
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Power rear view mirror control
Folding rear view mirrors
" 1 Control switch
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.
2 Master switch
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master
switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control
switch on the desired side.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
restricted areas.
The power rear view mirror can be adjusted when the key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
CAUTION
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free the
mirror.
102
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the
driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be
extended and properly adjusted before driving.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the “MIRROR” switch changes the mode
between AUTO and DAY.
The indicator comes on when the AUTO mode is selected.
DAY mode: The mirror surface is normal.
AUTO mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights
of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens
slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside
rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
To ensure correct functioning of an anti−glare mirror
sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch
or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear
view mirror always turns on in the AUTO mode.
103
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Compass
Displays
Directions
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the
vehicle is heading north.
Push the “COMP” switch to turn the compass system on
and off.
If the ignition switch was turned off with the system on, the
system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
D The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
D The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
D The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
D The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large
vehicle, etc.).
D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)
D The battery has been disconnected.
104
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Refer to the “Calibrating the
compass” in this section to set the zone number.
The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically
while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small.
For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see
“Calibrating the compass” below.
If the direction is not indicated or the system does not operate
properly, contact your Lexus dealer.
Calibrating the compass (deviation calibration)
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The angle
of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the
vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle, then push and hold
the “COMP” switch until the zone number appears on the
display. Then push the “COMP” switch, referring to the
following map to select the number of the zone where the
vehicle is.
"Compass sensor
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the
inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing so may
cause malfunction of the compass sensor in the mirror.
105
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Calibrating the compass (circling calibration)
16R198
To rectify the compass, stop the vehicle and push and hold the
“COMP” switch until “C” appears on the display.
There is also a case that “C” appears on the display in case of
the drastic change of the magnetic field.
"Zone number
Leaving the system after the calibration for several seconds,
the direction will appear on the display. It shows the zone
number is set.
106
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased
your Lexus. And then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or
disconnected.
D Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a
crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the direction shown on the display.
D During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
CAUTION
D When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
D Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
107
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
CAUTION
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 133 for
details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. Do not let the child sit on your lap. It does not provide
sufficient restraint. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are
not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag
may cause death or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow the child to stand up or kneel on either rear or front
seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision.
108
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
D Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people − even children.
D Avoid reclining the seatbacks too much. The seat
belts provide maximum protection when the
seatbacks are in the upright position.
(See
“Adjusting seatback angle” on page 96.)
D Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Fastening front and rear seat belts
D Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners − they may
severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the
interior” on page 359 for instructions.)
D Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
109
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and
is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child
restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on
page 133.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips − not
on your waist.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
D If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect
an adult occupant or your child from injury.
CAUTION
D Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hip as possible.
D For your safety, do not place the shoulder belt under
your arm.
110
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
"Front seat belts only
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the
anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock
release button then slide the anchor down. After the
adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause severe injuries in a
collision.
111
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Seat belt comfort guides
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from the child’s neck, and should
not fall off the child’s shoulder. Failure to observe these
precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
Seat belt extender
The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outside
rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the
shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at
the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little
forward.
Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the
shoulder belt.
The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward
position for other purposes.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because it is not
long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available
from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can
order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available
at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could result in less effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident,
increasing the chance of personal injury.
D Never use the seat belt extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without it.
112
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, or for
another person or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended for.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect
an adult occupant or your child from injury.
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
113
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Front seat belt pretensioners
The driver and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioners
are designed to be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact.
When the airbag sensor detects the shock of a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back in by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat
occupants.
The front seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.
114
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the front seat belt pretensioners are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 50
for instructions.)
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the front seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding
area or wiring. Doing so may cause sudden operation of
the front seat belt pretensioners or disable the system,
which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injuries. Consult your Lexus dealer about
any repairs and modifications.
" 1
2
3
4
Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies
SRS warning light
Front airbag sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
The front seat belt pretensioner system mainly consists of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an
operating noise may be heard and a small amount of
smoke−like gas may be released. This gas is harmless and
does not indicate that a fire is occurring.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the front seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
D Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two−way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player
D Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor
assemblies
D Modification of the suspension system
D Modification of the front end structure
Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the
seat belt retractors remain locked.
115
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
D Repair made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure or console
This front seat belt pretensioner system has a service
reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or pretensioners. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or the light remains on.
D The light comes on or flashes while driving.
D If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled
out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant front
seat belt pretensioner.
116
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
SRS AIRBAGS
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are
designed to provide further protection for the driver, front
passenger and rear outside passengers in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the front seat belt pretensioners to operate.
D Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding
area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
"SRS front airbags
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front
airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce
injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help to reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or
chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel or
dashboard.
The front passenger airbag is activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.
117
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS front
airbags are inflated.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly
recommends that:
"SRS side airbags
D The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags
for the driver or front passenger work together with the
seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or
front passenger’s chest.
D All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat is activated even
with no passenger in the front seat.
D The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS side
airbags are inflated.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
118
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
SRS side airbags inflate with considerable force. To
avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate,
the driver and front passenger must:
D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their back upright and
against the seat at all times.
"SRS curtain shield airbags for front and rear outside
occupants
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS curtain
shield airbag on either side works together with the seat
belts by inflating. The SRS curtain shield airbags help to
reduce injuries mainly to the driver ’s head, front
passenger’s head and rear outside passenger’s head.
The SRS curtain shield airbag is activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS
curtain shield airbags are inflated.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
119
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
The SRS curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable
force. To avoid potential death or serious injury when
they inflate, the driver, front passenger and rear outside
passengers must:
D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their back upright and
against the seat at all times.
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 50
for instructions.)
120
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if it is involved
in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the nose of
the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck,
etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions at the lower zone of airbag
sensor detection and activation, the SRS airbags and seat belt
pretensioners will not operate all together.
For the safety of all occupants, always wear your seat belts
properly.
The SRS front airbag system is designed to activate in
response to a severe frontal impact within the shaded area
between the arrows in the illustration.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when impacting
straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level,
the SRS front airbags may not deploy.
121
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
" 1 Collision from the rear
2 Vehicle rollover
The SRS front airbags are not designed to inflate if the
vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if
it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment gets a severe
collision from the side.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may rather not to
activate in the impact in which the occupant wearing the seat
belt correctly would not get serious injury.
122
" 1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment
2 Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side and curtain shield airbag system may not
activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the
side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
" 1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
" 1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags are not designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed
side collision.
The SRS airbags may deploy if a serious impact occurs to
the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown
in the illustration.
123
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
16E406
" 1 Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
2 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
3 Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
4 Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflater)
5 Curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
6 SRS warning light
7 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
8 Driver’s seat position sensor
9 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
10 Front airbag sensors
11 Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
124
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
In a severe frontal impact, the front airbag sensors detect
deceleration and the system triggers the front airbag inflators.
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag
sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side and curtain shield airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield
airbag inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the
forward or lateral motion of the occupants.
When the SRS airbag operates, it produces a fairly loud noise
and release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic
gas. This does not indicate a fire. This gas is normally
harmless; however, for those who have delicate skin, it may
cause a minor skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, dashboard,
front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side) may
be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will not
be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once.
CAUTION
D The SRS airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
side and front and rear outside passenger side seat
belt systems. The front and rear outside seat
occupants can be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat
belts properly. During sudden braking just before a
collision, an unrestrained driver, front passenger or
rear outside passenger can move forward or
sideways into direct contact with or close proximity
to the airbag which may then deploy during the
collision. To ensure maximum protection in an
accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle
must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat
belt properly during an accident reduces the chances
of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on
page 108.
A crash severe enough to inflate the driver and front passenger
airbags may break the windshield as the vehicle buckles. In
vehicles with a front passenger airbag, the windshield may
also be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the
inflating airbag.
125
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133.
D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the child.
126
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
"Move seat fully back
D A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat
as far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean over the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
airbags inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit
up straight and well back in the seat, and always use
your seat belt properly.
D Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the
child.
D For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133.
127
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
128
D Do not lean against the door when the vehicle is in
use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you
have a small child in the vehicle.
D Do not get your head closer to the area where the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these
airbags inflate with considerable speed and force;
you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
D Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the front seats
on vehicles with side airbags.
D Do not allow a child to kneel on the passenger seat
facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child
may be killed or seriously injured.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Do not allow a child to stand up or to kneel on the
front passenger seat, since the front airbag inflates
with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.
D Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the rear seat. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133.
D Do not put objects or your pets on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the
front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as they are projected
rearward by the force of the deploying airbags.
Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
129
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or
object on or around the door. When the side airbag
inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object
will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
D Do not attach a microphone or any other device or
object around the part where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars and roof side or assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the
microphone or other device or object will be hurled
with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not
activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects
on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates,
those items will be hurled away with great force or the
curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly.
When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook
directly.
130
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
D Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
front passenger airbag cover or airbag sensor
assembly. Doing so may cause sudden front airbags
inflation or disable the system, which could result in
death or serious injury.
D Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
front seats with side airbags. Such changes may
disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
D Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars
and roof side rail containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable the system or
cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS in some
cases.
D Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two−way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player
D Modification of the suspension system
D Modification of the front end structure and side
structure of the passenger compartment
D Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
D Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag or front
seats
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repairs and modifications.
131
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
This SRS airbag system has an indicator to inform the driver
of operating problems. If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
16E470
D When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, stays on or flashes.
D The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS front airbags have
a problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side and curtain shield
airbags have a problem.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
D Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
D The front of the vehicle and portion of the doors (shaded in
the illustration) were involved in an accident that was not
severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
132
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D The surface of the seats with the side airbags or the pad
section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag
cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
D The portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail
garnish (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags
inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for
children small enough to use them.
The laws of all fifty states in the U.S.A. and Canada now
require the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 108 for details.
CAUTION
D For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on age and size. Holding a child in your arms is not
a substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior
if you are unrestrained.
D Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
133
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force
of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or
serious injury if a rear−facing child restraint system
is installed on the front seat.
D Unless it is unavoidable, do not install a
forward−facing child restraint system on the front
seat.
D A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured. On vehicles with side airbags and curtain
shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the
front door or around the front door even if the child
is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous
if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate,
because the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which
accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
CAUTION
D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force
of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or
serious injury if a rear−facing child restraint system
is installed on the front seat.
D Unless it is unavoidable, do not install a
forward−facing child restraint system on the front
seat.
134
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front
door or around the front door even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate,
because the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
D After installing the child restraint system, make sure
it is secured in place according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If it is not restrained securely, it may
cause death or serious injury to the child in the event
of a sudden stop or accident.
Types of child restraint system
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 147.
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages” on page 150.
(A) Infant seat
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than
in the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from
injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
135
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
(B) Convertible seat
INSTALLATION WITH 3−POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
(C) Booster seat
An infant seat is used in rear−facing position only.
136
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the child.
D If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
137
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed.
It cannot protect your child from injury.
138
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
139
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
(B) Convertible seat installation
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle−release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
140
A convertible seat is used in forward−facing or rear−facing
position depending on the age and size of the child. When
installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable child’s age and size as well as directions for
installing the child restraint system.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
"Move seat fully back
CAUTION
D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the child.
D A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front
door or around the front door even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate,
because the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
141
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care
not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed.
It cannot protect your child from injury.
142
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
143
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
144
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle−release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
(C) Booster seat installation
"Move seat fully back
A booster seat is used in forward−facing position only.
CAUTION
D A forward−facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front
door or around the front door even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate,
because the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
145
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
D Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
D For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt
through or around the booster seat and child following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 108 for details.
CAUTION
D Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the
amount of protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.
146
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed.
It cannot protect your child from injury.
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Using a top strap
2. To remove the child restraint system, press the
buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract.
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
147
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
" 1 Anchor brackets
2 Symbol mark
Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear
seat to attach the top strap.
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET
1. Outside anchor brackets only—Remove the head
restraint.
Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of user ready anchor
bracket.
2. Pull up the lid of the anchor bracket.
148
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
4. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
5. Outside anchor brackets only—Replace the head
restraint.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child
restraint system” on page 134.
CAUTION
D Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and
check that the child restraint system is securely by
pushing and pulling it in different directions.
D Follow all the installation instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
149
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages
16E499
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system
interfaced with the FMVSS225 specification are installed
in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225
specification can be fixed with these anchorages. In this case,
it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat
belt on the vehicle.
150
"Type A
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Type A—
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages
and tighten the lower straps.
Type B—
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
16E500
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 147.)
For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual
equipped with each product.
"Type B
151
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
D When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
D Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
D Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat
if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front
seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the
child and front passenger in case of sudden braking
or a collision.
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
The microcomputer can memorize the positions of the driver’s
seat and outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving
position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and
the selector lever is in the “P” position.
Setting the driving position
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors
to the desired position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1” or “2”
until the signal beeps.
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
152
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
Conditions for memorized position activation
D Ignition key “ON” and selector lever in “P” position.
D Ignition switch off and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s
door.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of
the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”)
again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
CAUTION
D Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
When you push button “1” or “2”, the driving position will
be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that
button.
D Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch.
153
COMFORT ADJUSTMENT
154
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Theft deterrent
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
155
THEFT DETERRENT
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
"Security indicator light
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is
forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights.
Further more when the interior light switch is in the “DOOR”
position, the interior light turns on.
After the alarm is activated, when you unlock any door using
an ignition key or wireless remote control, the tail lights turn on
for about 2 seconds to inform you that the system was
activated.
Setting the system
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and
remove it.
The engine immobiliser system causes the indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an
ignition key or wireless remote control.
If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signal
lights flash once.
The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors,
trunk and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
156
THEFT DETERRENT
Cancelling the system
Testing the system
When you unlock any door or trunk using an ignition key
or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.
1. Open all the windows.
If you unlock any door or trunk with wireless remote control, the
turn signal lights flash twice.
Activating the system
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
2. Set the system as described above.
The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or
wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside.
The system should activate the alarm.
D Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key or
wireless remote control
4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless
remote control to cancel the system.
D Opening the hood forcibly
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood.
D Reconnecting the battery
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition
switch during the alarm sounding, the door is automatically
locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
D Unlock the door using an ignition key or wireless remote
control.
D Turn the ignition switch on.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of
information you have set in the computer memory. After
reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized
data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into
the computer once more.
157
THEFT DETERRENT
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A. ONLY)
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
158
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
159
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
20E283
160
AIR CONDITIONING
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects
the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on−off the
air conditioning according to the temperature.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
1
“TEMP” (driver side temperature control) button
2
Driver side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
3
Fan speed display
4
Outside temperature display
5
Air flow display
6
Passenger side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
7
“PASSENGER TEMP” (passenger side temperature
control) button
8
“DUAL” (temperature setting mode change) button
9
Windshield air flow button
10
“MODE”(air flow control) button
11
Air intake control button
12
Fan speed control button
13
“OFF” button
14
“AUTO” button
15
“A/C” button
161
AIR CONDITIONING
20E395
"Air flow selection
162
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION − automatic control
2. Use the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button to set
the desired temperature.
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic
operation mode has been selected.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on−off of the air
conditioning and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the operation corresponding to
the button depressed is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
Push the “OFF” button to turn the air conditioning system off.
The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button is used to set the
desired temperature. The temperature will be controlled on the
driver and passenger sides simultaneously or individually.
“TEMP” button—Changes the temperature on the driver and
passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only.
“PASSENGER TEMP” button—Changes the temperature on
the passenger side only.
“DUAL” button—Changes the mode of the temperature
setting.
The indicator on the “DUAL” button has two modes:
D With the indicator on—For individual temperature setting
D With the indicator off—For simultaneous temperature
setting
163
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION − manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired −
20E396
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is
as follows:
Driver side setting
Passenger side setting
Mixed setting
164
1
Panel − Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2
Bi−level − Air flows from both the floor vents and the
instrument panel vents.
3
Floor − Air flows mainly from the floor vents.
4
Floor/Windshield − Air flows mainly from the floor vents
and windshield vents.
AIR CONDITIONING
If quick heating or cooling is desired −
If manual switching of air intake is desired −
Push the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button on either
side and hold it until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX. COLD” appears on
the display.
If manual fan speed control is desired −
The air intake control button is used to switch the air intake
between the OUTSIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIR
mode.
" 1 Fan speed at low
2 Fan speed at high
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the
appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the
fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF”
button turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed
setting.
To turn the air source to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, press
the button. The indicator will come on. To turn the air source
to OUTSIDE AIR mode, press the button again. The indicator
will go off.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode
may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode
depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.
For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air
intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR
mode. This is not a malfunction.
If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, push the air intake
control button for RECIRCULATED AIR. The indicator light will
come on.
165
AIR CONDITIONING
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button
set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during
heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
If manual on−off of the air conditioning is desired −
Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push
it again to turn the air conditioning off.
The air conditioning does not work if the outside temperature
is lowered down to around 0_C (32_F).
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year−round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
To remove interior fog on the windshield −
Push the windshield air flow button.
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
“A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield −
Displaying the outside temperature −
3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain
a maximum air flow.
The temperature display ranges from −30_C (−22_F) up to
50_C (122_F).
4. Leave the “A/C” button off.
1. Push the “TEMP” button to set the maximum temperature.
2. Push the windshield air flow button.
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
166
AIR CONDITIONING
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
CAUTION
Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled
air operation in extremely humid weather.
The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
(c) Operating tips
D To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
D Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
D If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the side vents and
rear vents. (See “(d) Side vents and rear vents”.)
D On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The
windshield could fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.
D Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to
circulate throughout the vehicle.
D On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help
clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce
the amount of fogging on the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
be set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed to any
setting except “OFF”.
167
AIR CONDITIONING
D If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake be temporarily set to the RECIRCULATED AIR
mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent
outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.
Heating
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation −
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature − To the desired temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning − OFF
For manual operation −
Fan speed − To the desired fan speed
Temperature − Towards high temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − FLOOR
Air conditioning − OFF
D For quick heating, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few
minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select
OUTSIDE AIR after the vehicle interior has been warmed.
D Push the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.
D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior
while defrosting or defogging the windshield.
168
Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation −
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature − To the desired temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning − ON
For manual operation −
Fan speed − To the desired fan speed
Temperature − Towards low temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − PANEL
Air conditioning − ON
D For quick cooling, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few
minutes.
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation −
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature − Towards low temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning − OFF
AIR CONDITIONING
For manual operation −
Fan speed − To the desired fan speed
Temperature − Towards low temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − PANEL
Air conditioning − OFF
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
− The inside of the windshield
D On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield − the
difference between the outside and inside temperatures
could make the fogging worse.
For best results, set controls to:
− The outside of the windshield
For automatic operation −
For best results, set controls to:
Defogging and defrosting
Temperature − Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − WINDSHIELD
For manual operation −
Fan speed − To the desired fan speed
Temperature − Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − WINDSHIELD
For automatic operation −
Temperature − Towards high temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − WINDSHIELD
For manual operation −
Fan speed − To the desired fan speed
Temperature − Towards high temperature
Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow − WINDSHIELD
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
169
AIR CONDITIONING
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
(d) Side vents and rear vents
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
D To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield,
choose floor/windshield air flow.
"Side vents
"Rear vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the side vents
and rear vents. The side vents and rear vents may be
opened or closed as shown.
170
AIR CONDITIONING
(e) Checking and replacing the air
conditioning filter
1. Open the glove box. Remove the screw with a
Phillips−head screwdriver.
The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter
may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner and
heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency,
or if the windows become to fog up easily.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace
the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.)
2. Remove the 2 pins installed on the upper part of the
glove box and lower the glove box.
171
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
The air conditioning filter should be installed properly
in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter
removed
may
cause
deteriorated
dustproof
performance and then affect air conditioning
performance.
3. Take out the filter case.
4. Remove the filter from the filter case.
5. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
172
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio system (type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Audio system (type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System,
please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
173
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM (type A)
Quick reference for your audio system
20E412
"You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 61 for details.
174
AUDIO
1
Ejecting a compact disc
(See page 185 for details.)
2 Function buttons
1 − 6: Station selector buttons
(See page 181 for details.)
SCAN: Scan tuning
(See page 182 for details.)
P.SCAN:Preset scan tuning
(See page 182 for details.)
3 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode
: DOLBY NR
(See page 183 for details.)
AA: Rewinding or reversing
(See page 183 or 188 for details.)
"": Fast forwarding
(See page 183 or 188 for details.)
RPT: Automatic repeat
(See page 184 or 189 for details.)
SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape
(See page 184 for details.)
: Disc selection
(See page 187 for details.)
RAND:Random access
(See page 189 for details.)
SCAN: Scan selection
(See page 188 for details.)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Compact disc slot
(See page 185 for details.)
Automatic sound levelizer/Mute
(See page 177 or 179 for details.)
TUNE/AUDIO CONTROL knob
(See page 178 for details.)
A " : Side change
(See page 183 for details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 177 for details.)
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 182 for details.)
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 176 for details.)
Cassette tape slot
(See page 182 for details.)
Radio mode:
Seek tuning
(See page 181 for details.)
TAPE mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 184 for details.)
CD mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 188 for details.)
175
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
(a) Turning the system on and off
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio
sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in.
Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
176
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
AUDIO
Push the “MUTE” button to decrease the volume
momentarily.
Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on
that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
To return to its original volume, push the same button again.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
When the audio system is turned on, the mute is always off
regardless of the previous mode.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc
player does not turn on.
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
177
AUDIO
In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are
shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch
just below to turn on each function.
Each time you push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob, the
display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone
and balance, turn the knob.
(b) Tone and balance
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones.
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range
and bass.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left
speakers.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
178
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear
speakers.
AUDIO
(c) Automatic sound levelizer
(e) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to
the right.
NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
(f) Your compact disc player
When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to
road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts
to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise
level. While the automatic sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears
on the display.
(d) Your radio antennas
The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
NOTICE
D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
When you insert a disc, gently push it in with the label face up.
(The player will automatically eject a disc if the label face is
down.) The compact disc player will play from track 1 through
the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 again. On
models with the compact disc auto changer, next disc will be
played from track 1.
NOTICE
D Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the
compact disc player. Do not insert anything other
than compact discs into the slot.
D Do not insert a disc upon another one.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
D Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the rear window may affect the
reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
179
AUDIO
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or
to the left to step down.
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display.
180
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold
it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button
and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and
will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the
stations will be searched out one after another.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1−6 ) for the station you want.
The button number ( 1−6 ) and station frequency appear on the
display.
Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob. The radio will step up
or down to another frequency.
181
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “P.SCAN” button.
“P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the
next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds,
and then move to the next preset station. To select a station,
push the “P.SCAN” button a second time.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and
“METAL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button.
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
182
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the
button by the double−D symbol. The display will indicate that
the Dolby noise reduction system is on.
“Program” button: Push the “ A " ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected (“Y” indicates top side, “B” indicates
bottom side).
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on
or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
“Rewind” button: Push the “AA” button to rewind a tape.
“REW” appears on the display.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double−D
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE”
button.
183
AUDIO
(c) Automatic program selection
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, push the button once again.
184
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
AUDIO
Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the
button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
Compact disc player operation
D If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
(a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs
D When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
“RPT”, “SKIP” and “Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
D Setting a compact disc:
Gently push a disc in with the label faces up. (The player
will automatically eject a disc if the label faces down.)
185
AUDIO
(b) Playing a compact disc
D Ejecting a compact disc:
Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc.
Push the “DISC” button if the disc is already loaded in the
player.
“CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played continuously. The track
number and the time from the beginning of the program appear
on the display.
When play of disc ends, the first track starts.
WIth a compact disc changer only—
Push the “DISC” button twice if the magazine is already
loaded in the player.
“CD1” appears on the display.
The discs set in the magazine are played continuously. The
disc number of the disc currently being played, the track
number and the time from the beginning of the program appear
on the display.
186
AUDIO
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
(c) Selecting a desired disc (with a compact disc changer
only)
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
Pushing the “DISC” button while playing a disc in the automatic
changer will switch from the disc in the changer to the disc in
the compact disc player.
If you push the “DISC” button when the source is other than the
compact disc, a disc in the compact disc player or automatic
changer, whichever was previously used, will play.
Push the “ ” or “ ” button to select the disc number.
Push the button several times until the desired disc number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.
187
AUDIO
(d) Searching for a desired track or disc
(e) Selecting a desired track
Searching for a desired track:
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the
display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10
seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN”
button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc,
it will continue scanning at track 1.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
Searching for a desired disc (with a compact disc changer
only):
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “D.SCAN”
on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will
be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program
of your choice, push the button a second time.
After all the discs in the automatic changer are scanned in one
pass, the scan function is cancelled.
188
“Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button and hold it to
fast forward the disc. When you release the button, the
compact disc player will resume playing from that position.
“Reverse” button: Push the “AA” button and hold it to
reverse the disc. When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
AUDIO
(f) Repeating a track or a disc
(g) Random playing
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features—you can either
replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
“RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player
in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific
compact disc in random order.
Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. When the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.
Repeating a disc (with a compact disc changer only):
Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you hear a beep.
“D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player will repeat all
the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends,
the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc
and replay. This process will be continued until you push the
button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND”
button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the
disc you are listening to in random order.
Random playing for all the tracks in the compact disc
changer (with a compact disc changer only): Push the
“RAND” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “D.RAND” will
appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks
on all the discs in the automatic changer in random order. To
turn off the random feature, push “RAND” a second time.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
189
AUDIO
(h) If the player malfunctions
Car audio system operating hints
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four
following error messages.
If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside
of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up−side down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It
indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
D Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
D Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or
compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact
disc slot.
D The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there
is a problem with your radio − it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
190
AUDIO
FM
AM
Fading and drifting stations − Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the
distance from the radio transmitter. They are often
accompanied by distortion.
Fading − AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere − especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Multi−path − FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering − These occur when signals are blocked
by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping − If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
Station interference − When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Static − AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
D A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
191
AUDIO
Use high−quality cassettes:
Caring for your compact disc player and discs
D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or
tangled in the cassette player.
D Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
D Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
D Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
D Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
D Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
D Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc
player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to
cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact
disc player skip.
D If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not
hear any sound even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and
wait until the player dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
192
AUDIO
D Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The
following products may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
"Special shaped discs
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
"Low quality discs
193
AUDIO
"Labeled discs
"Correct
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use
special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.
194
"Wrong
D Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set
them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
D Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
AUDIO
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth
that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not
use a conventional record cleaner or anti−static device.
195
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM (type B)
Quick reference for your audio system
20E413
"You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 61 for details.
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel.
196
AUDIO
1
Ejecting a compact disc
(See page 209 for details.)
2 Function buttons
1 − 6: Station selector buttons
(See page 203 for details.)
SCAN: Scan tuning
(See page 203 for details.)
MSG: Message button
(See page 205 for details.)
3 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode
A " : Side change
(See page 207 for details.)
: DOLBY NR
(See page 207 for details.)
AA: Rewinding or reversing
(See page 207 or 212 for details.)
"": Fast forwarding
(See page 207 or 212 for details.)
RPT: Automatic repeat
(See page 208 or 213 for details.)
SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape
(See page 208 for details.)
: Disc selection
(See page 211 for details.)
RAND:Random access
(See page 213 for details.)
SCAN: Scan selection
(See page 212 for details.)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Compact disc slot
(See page 209 for details.)
Compact disc load button
(See page 209 for details.)
Radio data system/Program type
(See page 204 for details.)
TUNE/AUDIO CONTROL knob
(See page 200 for details.)
Traffic announcement
(See page 205 for details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 199 for details.)
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 206 for details.)
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 198 for details.)
Cassette tape slot
(See page 206 for details.)
Radio mode:
Seek tuning
(See page 203 for details.)
TAPE mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 208 for details.)
CD mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 212 for details.)
197
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
(a) Turning the system on and off
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio
sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in.
Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
198
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
AUDIO
Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on
that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc
player does not turn on.
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are
shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch
just below to turn on each function.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range
and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
199
AUDIO
(c) Your radio antennas
The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
NOTICE
D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
Each time you push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob, the
display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone
and balance or turn on or off the automatic sound
levelizer, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones.
D Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the rear window may affect the
reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
(d) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to
the right.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear
speakers.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left
speakers.
ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer.
Automatic sound levelizer: When the audio sound becomes
difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during
driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound
levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display.
200
NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
AUDIO
(e) Your compact disc player with changer
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
Your compact disc player with changer can store up to 6 discs
and play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set
in the player.
When you set discs into the player, make sure their labels face
up. If not, the player will display “ERROR 1” and the disc
number.
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM TYPE” appears on the display.
NOTICE
D Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the
compact disc player. Do not insert anything other
than compact discs into the slot.
D Do not insert a disc upon another one.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
201
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or
to the left to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold
it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button
and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
202
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and
will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the
stations will be searched out one after another.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1−6 ) for the station you want.
The button number ( 1−6 ) and station frequency appear on the
display.
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio
will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for
a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To
select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob. The radio will step up
or down to another frequency.
203
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
TYPE (Program type):
When you push the “TYPE” button while receiving an RDS
station, the current program type appears on the display.
Each time you push the “TYPE” button, the program type
changes as in the following:
D ROCK
D EASY LIS (Easy listening)
D CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)
D R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
D INFORM (Information)
When you push the “RDS” button briefly during FM reception,
the RDS turns on. “RDS” and “RDS SEARCH” appear on the
display and the radio starts to search RDS stations.
D RELIGION
If no RDS stations can be found, “NOTHING” appears and the
display returns to the previous mode.
D ALERT (Emergency message)
If RDS stations are found, “FOUND **ST” appears on the
display (** indicating the number of stations which are found)
in the FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are preset by
program type.
To turn off the RDS, push the “RDS” button until you hear a
beep.
204
D MISC
AUDIO
TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly
broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
Radio text message:
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on
the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears
on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the
previous mode.
If the radio receives a radio text message during FM reception,
“MSG” and a text message appears on the display. After the
text message goes off, “MSG” also goes off.
After the text message goes off from the display, pushing the
“MSG” button during message reception shows the text
message again on the display.
The RDS audio system can store three messages consisting
of 64 characters in memory. To store a message in memory,
push the “MSG” button until you hear a beep.
If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest
message will be overwritten by the new message.
205
AUDIO
To recall a radio text message, push the “MSG” button. Each
time you push the button, the available message will be
displayed beginning with the newest one.
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
If there is no radio text message in memory and when no
message is received, “NO MSG STORED” appears on the
display. After this, the display returns to the previous mode.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and
“METAL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button.
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
206
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the
button by the double−D symbol. The display will indicate that
the Dolby noise reduction system is on.
“Program” button: Push the “ A " ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected (“Y” indicates top side, “B” indicates
bottom side).
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on
or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
“Rewind” button: Push the “AA” button to rewind a tape.
“REW” appears on the display.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double−D
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE”
button.
207
AUDIO
(c) Automatic program selection
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, push the button once again.
208
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
AUDIO
Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the
button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
Compact disc player operation
D If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
(a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs
Your compact disc player with changer can store up to 6 discs.
D When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
“RPT”, “SKIP” and “Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
D Setting a single compact disc:
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
The green indicators of the slot start blinking and “WAIT”
appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on
and “WAIT” changes to “LOAD”, the CD door opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number.
After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case,
“ERROR 1” and disc number appear on the display.
209
AUDIO
If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure
to insert another disc.
D Setting all the discs:
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
The green indicators of the slot start blinking and “WAIT”
appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on
and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the CD door opens.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs.
1. Push the “ ” or “ ” button to display the disc number
you want to eject.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
2. Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc briefly.
If you do not insert discs within 15 seconds after pushing the
“LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be
canceled automatically.
At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at
both ends of the slot as well as disc number light up.
NOTICE
Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc until you
hear a beep.
Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or
feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting
stuck in the player.
210
D Ejecting a single disc alone:
D Ejecting all the discs:
AUDIO
(b) Playing a compact disc
(c) Selecting a desired disc
Push the “DISC” button if the discs are already loaded in
the player.
Searching for a desired disc:
“CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting
with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc
currently being played, the track number and the time from the
beginning of the program appear on the display.
Push the “ ” or “ ” button to select the disc number.
Push the button several times until the desired disc number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
211
AUDIO
(d) Searching for a desired track or disc
(e) Selecting a desired track
Searching for a desired track:
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the
display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10
seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN”
button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc,
it will continue scanning at track 1.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
Searching for a desired disc:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “D.SCAN”
on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will
be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program
of your choice, push the button a second time.
After all the discs in the automatic changer are scanned in one
pass, the scan function is cancelled.
212
“Fast forward” button:
Push the “""” button and hold it to fast forward the disc.
When you release the button, the compact disc player will
resume playing from that position.
“Reverse” button:
Push the “AA” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When
you release the button, the compact disc player will resume
playing.
AUDIO
(f) Repeating a track or a disc
(g) Random playing
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either
replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
“RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player
in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific
compact disc in random order.
Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. When the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.
Repeating a disc: Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you
hear a beep. “D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player
will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When
the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top
track of the disc and replay. This process will be continued until
you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND”
button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the
disc you are listening to in random order.
Random playing for all the tracks in the automatic
changer: Push the “RAND” button and hold it until you hear
a beep. “D.RAND” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in the automatic changer
in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “RAND”
a second time.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
213
AUDIO
(h) If the player malfunctions
Car audio system operating hints
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four
following error messages.
If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside
of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up−side down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It
indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
D Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
D Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or
compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact
disc slot.
D The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there
is a problem with your radio − it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
214
AUDIO
FM
AM
Fading and drifting stations − Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the
distance from the radio transmitter. They are often
accompanied by distortion.
Fading − AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere − especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Multi−path − FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering − These occur when signals are blocked
by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping − If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
Station interference − When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Static − AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
D A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
215
AUDIO
Use high−quality cassettes:
Caring for your compact disc player and discs
D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or
tangled in the cassette player.
D Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
D Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
D Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
D Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
D Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
D Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc
player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to
cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact
disc player skip.
D If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not
hear any sound even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and
wait until the player dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
216
AUDIO
D Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The
following products may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
"Special shaped discs
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
"Low quality discs
217
AUDIO
"Labeled discs
"Correct
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use
special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.
218
"Wrong
D Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set
them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
D Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
AUDIO
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth
that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not
use a conventional record cleaner or anti−static device.
219
AUDIO
220
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three−way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic modulated suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle skid control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
223
224
225
226
226
227
234
237
237
240
242
246
246
221
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE−WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three−way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
D Use only unleaded gasoline.
D Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three−way catalytic
converter.
D Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
The three−way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
D Avoid racing the engine.
It looks somewhat like a muffler, but its purpose is to reduce
pollutants in the exhaust gas.
D Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is
moving.
CAUTION
D Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
D Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything
that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
222
D Do not push−start or pull−start your vehicle.
D Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system,
electronic ignition system/distributor ignition
system or fuel system could cause an extremely high
three−way catalytic converter temperature.
D If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check−up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three−way catalytic
converter system best.
STARTING AND DRIVING
D To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s
Manual
Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
CAUTION
D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
D Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
D Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
D Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
D Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or
unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
223
STARTING AND DRIVING
D To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
D If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with
the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the
cause immediately located and corrected.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle,
seat cushion height, head restraint height and steering wheel
angle.
3. Vehicles with power adjustable pedals—Adjust the position
of the accelerator and brake pedals.
4. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
5. Lock all doors.
6. Fasten seat belts.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when turning the key to “ON”, and check the fuel
gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
224
STARTING AND DRIVING
IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING
LOCK
“START” − Starter motor on. The key will return to the
“ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 226.
“ON” − Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine
is not running. The battery will discharge and the
electronic ignition system could be damaged.
“ACC” − Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open
the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.
“LOCK” − Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
To turn the ignition switch from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position,
you must put the transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is
automatically set. See “Engine immobiliser system” on page
14.
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
“LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while
turning the key gently.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the key only to “ACC”.
225
STARTING AND DRIVING
PARKING BRAKE
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
To set: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right
foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left
foot.
To release: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your
right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left
foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal
will follow it to the released position.
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.
226
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
“Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
CAUTION
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by
turning the key to “START”. Release it when the engine starts.
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
2. After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are ready
to drive.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the weather is below freezing, let the engine warm up for a
few minutes before driving. Do not leave the vehicle while the
engine is warming up.
If the engine stalls ...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in “ON”
position. (K)
If the engine will not start ...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 264.
NOTICE
D Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
D Do not race a cold engine.
D If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
31E158
227
STARTING AND DRIVING
"The shift position is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking (shifting into overdrive not
possible)
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For
the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page
236.
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking
228
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Normal driving
Using engine braking
Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
Backing up
Parking
Good driving practice
If you cannot shift the selector lever
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Normal driving
" 1 Brake pedal
" 1 “P” (Park) position
2 “N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the
engine” on page 226.
The transmission must be in “P” or “N”. The engine will not start
in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to
“START”.
2 “D” (Drive) position
2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to “D”.
Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet
driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is
low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the “D” position. (See “(b) Using engine braking” and “(f)
Good driving practice” for exceptions.)
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
229
STARTING AND DRIVING
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
(b) Using engine braking
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and
automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines,
declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down
automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the
suitable driving power and engine braking.
When the lever is in the “4” position, the automatic
transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the
running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the
accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides
more acceleration by automatically downshifting the
transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on
the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(b) Using engine braking”.
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the
transmission in the way described below:
1
Shift into the “4” position. The transmission will downshift
to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be
applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. If you
need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 236.
2
230
Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift
to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than 147 km/h (91 mph) and more powerful engine
braking will be enabled.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3
4
Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift
to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes
lower than 95 km/h (59 mph) and more powerful engine
braking than that of “3” position will be enabled.
(c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift
to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than 41 km/h (25 mph) and maximum engine braking will
be enabled.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”, you can start the vehicle
in motion as with the lever in “D”.
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine
braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the vehicle will start in first
gear and automatically shift to second gear or third gear.
CAUTION
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in
first gear.
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
NOTICE
D Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the
tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the
red zone. The approximate maximum allowable
speed for each position is given above for your
reference.
“3” . . . 147 km/h (91 mph)
“2” . . . 94 km/h (58 mph)
“L” . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)
D Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long
time in the “3”, “2” or “L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from
overheating. To prevent such damage, “4” position
should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.
231
STARTING AND DRIVING
(e) Parking
(d) Backing up
" 1 Brake pedal
2 “R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “R” position.
NOTICE
" 1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake pedal
3 “P” (Park) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the parking brake fully to securely apply the
parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “P” position.
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under
any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious
mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may
result.
232
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Good driving practice
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between
fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the
selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope.
If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For
instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 284.
D When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine
braking and electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold
the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
233
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
Turning on the system
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
CAUTION
D To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow−covered) or winding roads.
To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns
the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster
shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed.
Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off.
D Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
When the ignition key is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push
the main switch again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the main switch off when not using the cruise control.
234
STARTING AND DRIVING
Setting operation
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than
these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
"Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed
The transmission must be in “D” before you set the cruise
control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and release it. This
sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration − for example,
when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction quickly.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle
and then press the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction.
235
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired
speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the
vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction quickly.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” position to
“4” with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. To
decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the
brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or
by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to
cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below
about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed.
236
Cruise control failure warning
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
when using the cruise control, push the main switch to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some
trouble in the cruise control system. Contact your Lexus dealer
and have your Lexus inspected.
D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
STARTING AND DRIVING
ELECTRONIC MODULATED
SUSPENSION
This electronic modulated suspension adjusts the
damping effect on the shock absorbers with the control
switch. Select one of the 4 modes which is suited to the
driving conditions with the control switch to provide good
riding comfort and stability.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
The traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of front wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the system
automatically turns on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power against front wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
For sporty type driving such as on winding mountain
roads and high speed driving
For moderate high speed driving
For ordinary driving such as in the city traffic
For driving on a bumpy road
Soft
Firm
237
STARTING AND DRIVING
Normal driving mode
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Traction control off mode
"Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is
started. This means that the traction control system is in the
self−check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following
conditions occur:
D The system controls the spinning of the front wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
D You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
238
If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on
a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control
system. This system that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.
The vehicle skid control system is always activated, even if the
traction control system is turned off.
To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.
STARTING AND DRIVING
“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It will come on again when
you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn off the system.
If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work.
However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
D The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key
is turned to “ON”.
D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
D The indicator light remains on after the ignition is turned on.
D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
D The indicator light comes on with the normal driving mode
while driving.
“VSC” warning light
D The warning light comes on while driving.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC”
warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not
pushed.
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
traction control system or the vehicle skid control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
239
STARTING AND DRIVING
VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEM
The vehicle skid control system helps provide integrated
control of the systems such as anti−lock brake system,
traction control, engine control, etc. This system
automatically controls the brakes and engine to help
prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a
slippery road surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
The system will activate when your vehicle speed reaches or
exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph), and will deactivate when the vehicle
speed reduced to below 15 km/h (9 mph).
D Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacture, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle skid
control system may not function correctly. When
replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Lexus
dealer.
D In situations where the road surface is covered with
ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is
started. This means that the system is in the self−check mode
but does not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
D Do not rely excessively on the vehicle skid control
system. Even if the vehicle skid control system is
operating, you must always drive carefully and
attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving
will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip
indicator light blinks, sounding an alarm, special
care should be taken while driving.
"Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
240
STARTING AND DRIVING
“VSC” warning light
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC”
warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not
pushed.
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or the traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work.
However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
D The warning light comes on while driving.
241
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic
system with two separate sub−systems. If either sub−system
should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be
harder to press, and your stopping distance will be longer.
Also, the brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power−assist the
brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There
is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more!
CAUTION
D Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved
vacuum.
D Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will be longer.
242
Anti−lock brake system
The anti−lock brake system is designed to help prevent
lock−up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking
on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing
directional stability and steering performance of the
vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti−lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti−lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on the manhole cover, the steel plate under the construction,
joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the
anti−lock brake system.
STARTING AND DRIVING
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle is started. This means that the anti−lock
brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not indicate
a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
D You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock brake system:
Although the anti−lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti−lock
brake system on.
If tires grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti−lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at the moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti−lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.
D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
D Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti−lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
243
STARTING AND DRIVING
“ABS” warning light
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
" 1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
Vehicles without vehicle skid control system—
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the
systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
244
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Vehicles with vehicle skid control system—
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid
control system do not operate, but the brake system still
operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
D The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Drum−in−disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes
and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding−down.
Brake assist system (vehicles with vehicle
skid control system)
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system
judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal
firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be
applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS
warning light” on page 55.
In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
245
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped
with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to
highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance
as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on
snow−covered or icy roads. For driving on snow−covered or
icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes
give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the
extent that replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have
the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
246
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow
and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well
as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
D Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the
sizes different from the originals.
D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your
vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
247
STARTING AND DRIVING
248
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle
last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
250
251
252
254
254
260
249
DRIVING TIPS
BREAK−IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break−in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
D Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
D Avoid racing the engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
D Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).
250
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
DRIVING TIPS
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage resulting in tire bursts.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
D When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
D Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
D Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
D Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
D Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
D To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 230.
D Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
D Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the
legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h
(85 mph) unless your vehicle has high−speed
capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle are high−speed
capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
251
DRIVING TIPS
D Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure you have a proper freeze protection of engine
coolant.
Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol type coolant for a
proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. Use
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. See
“Checking the engine coolant level” on page 315 for
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
When it is extremely cold, we recommend to use 60% solution
for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about −50_C
(−58_F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant
performance.
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 341 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
252
DRIVING TIPS
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
See page 314 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer − they will be pleased to help.
Check the electronic ignition system for loose
connections or obvious damage.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the rear
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
253
DRIVING TIPS
DINGHY TOWING
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger−carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability and driving
economy (fuel consumption etc.). Your safety and satisfaction
depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious
driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you
must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do
not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer
for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for
further details before towing.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
We recommend you to use a weight carrying hitch when towing
a trailer.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
254
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Lexus
dealer for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit etc.
DRIVING TIPS
Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building
supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
D Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight
capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine
the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the maximum weight
rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch
manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injuries.
D The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the
sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver,
passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load.
It also includes the weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
D The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from
distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles
must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
"Certification label
CAUTION
D The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
load) must not exceed 907 kg (2000 lb.). Exceeding
this weight is dangerous.
255
DRIVING TIPS
Hitches
D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should
be consulted.
32L002
D Use only a hitch which is recommended by Lexus dealer
and conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
D Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
"Total trailer weight
"Tongue load
D The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that
the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight,
not exceeding the maximum of 90 kg (200 lb.).
Tongue load
x 100 = 9 to 11%
Total trailer weight
D Never load the trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should
be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40%
in the rear.
256
D Lexus recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever
you are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is
struck from behind. After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of
pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
NOTICE
D Install the trailer hitch using only the position
recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
D Do not use axle−mounted hitches as they can cause
damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels
or tires.
DRIVING TIPS
Brakes and safety chains
Tires
D Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to
any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
indicated below:
D A safety chain must always be used between the towing
vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should cross under the
trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.
For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.
CAUTION
D If the total trailer weight exceeds 500 kg (1102 lb.),
trailer brakes are required.
D Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it
will lower its braking effectiveness.
D Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain
securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle.
If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball,
there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over
into another lane.
Tire pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Front
200 (2.0, 29)
Rear
200 (2.0, 29)
D The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure
recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the
total trailer weight.
Trailer lights
D Trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and
local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer
or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals
and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a
malfunction of your lights.
Break−in schedule
D Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new
vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for
the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
257
DRIVING TIPS
Maintenance
Trailer towing tips
D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent
maintenance due to the additional load. For this
information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance
information in the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently
than when not towing. The three main causes of
vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when
towing:
D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after
approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
D Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all
vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice
turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away
from traffic until you learn the feel.
Pre−towing safety check
D Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or
unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down condition, and check
for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or
other possible causes.
D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it
cannot shift.
D Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal,
state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install
required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
258
D Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right
to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally
opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just
turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or
prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing
to reduce the risk of an accident.
D Because stopping distance may be increased,
vehicle−to−vehicle distance should be increased when
towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow
at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the
vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,
resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
DRIVING TIPS
D Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit
your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn
to avoid the need of sudden braking.
D Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will
be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than
normal turning radius with your vehicle.
D Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling
of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to
the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being
passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip
the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to
reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you
make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes,
your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
D Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not
forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty
of room before changing lanes.
D In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical
charging performance, do not use overdrive.
D Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s
engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a
trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 269.
D Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put
the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a
trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing
the following:
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R” position.
259
DRIVING TIPS
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull
or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability
(swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination
usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding
72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
D Slow down and downshift before descending steep
or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
D Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy − just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
D Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
D Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving − but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
D Always drive with the automatic transmission selector
lever in the “D” position when engine braking is not
required. Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel
economy. (For details, see “Automatic transmission” on
page 227.)
D Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
D Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
260
DRIVING TIPS
D Avoid engine over−revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
D Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop−and−go driving wastes fuel.
D Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
D Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
D Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
D Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud etc. This
not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
261
DRIVING TIPS
262
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
264
268
269
270
277
278
284
285
263
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving ...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try starting the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the
engine” on page 226 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser system,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, the system is possibly
broken. Call your Lexus dealer. See “Keys” on page 10.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly −
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See
“Foreword”.)
264
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three−way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start −
1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
See “(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the key to “START” with the accelerator
pedal held down. Continue this operation for 30 seconds and
then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking,
release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
265
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See “Foreword”.)
CAUTION
D Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
D If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention.
If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
D The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
266
D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval
battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
40E128
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (−) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
" 5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(−) terminal of the booster battery.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (e.g.
cylinder head) away from the battery. Do not connect it
to or near any part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
267
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE THE
ENGINE SPEED
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator
pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere
in your electronic throttle control system.
5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now
contain sulfuric acid.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
268
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the
parking brake.
CAUTION
D When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
D Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
CAUTION
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
D Is the cooling fan operating?
D Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
269
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place − well away from the
traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park
on a level spot with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
D Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”.
D Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel
changing.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from
traffic.
D Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
D When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
CAUTION
D Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and
change the tire.
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
NOTICE
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle
supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may
occur.
D Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block
the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.
270
D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving
even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel
beyond repair.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
1. Lift up the deck board and hang the deck board hook on
the right hinge of the trunk lid.
" 1 Spare tire 2 Jack handle
4 Jack 5 Towing eyelet
3 Wrench
Make sure the board does not fall down.
2. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire.
When closing the board, replace the hook in its original
position.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize
yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their
storage locations. The jack handle and wrench are attached
at the reverse side of the cover.
271
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
" 1 Joint
2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the
“contract” direction until the jack is free.
3 When storing, turn the joint by hand in the “expand”
direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it
from flying forward during a collision or sudden
braking.
272
To remove the spare tire:
1
Remove the spare tire cover.
2
Loosen the bolt and remove it.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side of the
wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and install the spare
tire cover to prevent the tire from flying forward during a
collision or sudden braking.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep
the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one
of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them. To get
maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle
is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the
end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the
wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet − just unscrew them about one−half
turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could
cause a serious accident.
273
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
5. Position the jack at the jack points as shown. Rotate
the load rest 90_ from storage position to lifting position.
6. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when
putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a
loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle
and begins to lift, double−check that it is properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
274
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
7. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the
wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole.
Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can
by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them
more.
CAUTION
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the
mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of
wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting
surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause
a wheel to come off while driving.
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so
may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the
bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.
275
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
D When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of
your body and all other persons around will not be
injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
D Have the wheel nuts tightened by torque wrench at
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon as possible
after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may
loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel
nuts.
10.After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the
replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use
other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench
is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat
the process until all the nuts are tight.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and possible cause air leakage.
If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire
are securely in place in their storage location to reduce
the possibility of personal injury during a collision or
sudden braking.
276
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.,
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
If your vehicle is equipped with the traction control
system, turn off the system to become unstuck. (For
details, see “Traction control system” on page 237.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
D Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
D Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
D If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
277
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
D From front
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 282.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.
Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is
possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle,
make sure the following precautions are observed. If
necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
278
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate
ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle.
Otherwise, the bumper and/or
underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during
towing.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
D From rear
(b) Using a flat bed truck
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
D Tie down points
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
279
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
"Rear emergency towing eyelets
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.
280
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
D Tie down angle
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45_.
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
281
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(d) Emergency towing
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard−surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
NOTICE
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain
to the towing eyelet provided.
To install the front towing eyelet, see “(e) Installing front towing
eyelet” on page 283.
Before towing, release the parking brake and put the
transmission in “N”. The ignition key must be in “ACC” (engine
off) or “ON” (engine running).
NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your
vehicle may be damaged.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
282
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(e) Installing front towing eyelet
1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover on the front bumper
using a flat−bladed screwdriver. To protect the bodywork,
place a piece of rag over the cover.
2. Use the front towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole
on the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location,
see page 271.)
283
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SELECTOR LEVER
3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut
wrench.
CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to
tighten the front eyelet securely. If the tightening is
loose, it may come off when being towed and result in
death or serious injury.
284
If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position to
other positions even though the brake pedal is depressed,
use the shift lock override button as follows:
1
Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2
Pry up the cover with a flat−bladed screwdriver or
equivalent.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and master key, because
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser
system.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. However, if you lose all your master keys, the
dealer cannot duplicate key but only replace the whole system.
3
Push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out
of “P” position only while pushing the button.
4
Shift into “N” position.
Insert the cover. Start the engine. For your safety, keep
the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 10.
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new
key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in,
we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the
least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid
cuts from the glass.
285
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
286
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . .
288
289
292
293
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer
to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
287
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer
maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to
save both your time and money. However, each regular
maintenance as well as day−to−day care is more important
than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble−free, safe, and
economical driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for
complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−to−day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
288
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
It is recommended that any replacement parts used for
maintenance or for the repair of the emission control
system be Lexus supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
MAINTENANCE
Where to go for service?
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Lexus technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle.
CAUTION
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. And
if any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended. Please be aware that
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See your “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
Make these checks only where adequate ventilation can
be obtained if you run the engine.
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Tire pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least
once a month and adjust as shown on the tire pressure label.
See page 324 for additional information.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
See page 326 for additional information.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for
looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
289
MAINTENANCE
Tire rotation
Vehicle interior
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
See page 326 for additional information.
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Fluid leaks
Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Lights
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers function properly.
Doors and engine hood
Steering wheel
Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and
all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood
secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is
released.
Check that it has the specified freeplay. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive
freeplay or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
290
MAINTENANCE
Accelerator pedal
Engine compartment
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Brake pedal
Washer fluid
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function.
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 348 for
additional information.
Brakes
Engine coolant level
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Make sure the coolant level is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page
315 for additional information.
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with
the selector lever in “P” position and all brakes released.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 317 for
additional information.
Battery
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page
341 for additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 322 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 312 for additional
information.
291
MAINTENANCE
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in
the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 323 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 223.)
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip−offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
D Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
D Appreciable loss of power
D Strange engine noises
D A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
D Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
D Flat−looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
D Strange noises related to suspension movement
D Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
D Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
292
MAINTENANCE
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE (I/M)
PROGRAMS
CAUTION
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
293
MAINTENANCE
294
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
297
298
299
301
295
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
296
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
1
Power steering fluid
reservoir
2
Engine oil filler cap
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Battery
6
Fuse box
7
Radiator
8
Condenser
9
Electric cooling fans
10
Engine oil level
dipstick
11
Washer fluid tank
12
Engine coolant
reservoir
297
INTRODUCTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
Performing do−it−yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself
maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 299.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
CAUTION
D When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
D Right after driving, the engine compartment − the
engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power
steering fluid reservoir, etc. − will be hot. So be
careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
D Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
D Be sure that the ignition is off if you work near the
electric cooling fans or radiator grille. With the
ignition on, the electric cooling fans will
automatically start to run if the engine coolant
temperature is high and/or the air conditioning is on.
D Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
298
INTRODUCTION
D Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
NOTICE
D Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
D Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
D Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
D Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the
transmission could be damaged.
D Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
PARTS AND TOOLS
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Checking the engine oil level
Parts (if level is low):
D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equvalent
See page 314 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:
D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):
D “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 315 for
instructions.
D Demineralized or distilled water
Tools:
D Funnel (only for adding coolant)
299
INTRODUCTION
Checking brake fluid
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
D FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
D Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
Tools:
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Adding washer fluid
Checking power steering fluid
Parts:
Parts (if level is low):
D Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III
Tools:
D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking battery condition
Tools:
D Warm water
D Baking soda
D Grease
D Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
D Fuse with same amperage rating as original
300
D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
D Funnel
INTRODUCTION
POSITIONING THE JACK
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle
supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
"Front
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block
the wheels on the opposite side of the jack up point
if necessary.
D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support
stands.
D Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
"Rear
When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the
jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.
NOTICE
301
INTRODUCTION
Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle
may be damaged.
302
INTRODUCTION
303
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
305
308
310
311
312
315
317
317
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
− GENERAL
Model
1MZ − FE
Type
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
87.5
Displacement
2995 cm3 (182.8 cu. in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 − 0.25 mm (0.006 − 0.010 in.)
0.25 − 0.35 mm (0.010 − 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension (with Borroughs drive belt
tension gauge No. BT−33−73F)
115 " 20 lb.
− FUEL
Fuel type
Octane Rating
83 mm (3.44
3.27 in.)
Only UNLEADED
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
305
ENGINE
− LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
With filter
Without filter
4.7 L (5.0 qt., 4.1 lmp. qt.)
4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp. qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):
62Z002
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
306
ENGINE
− COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.2 lmp. qt.)
Coolant type
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent
With ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of
aluminum components
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend
using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
− IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
− Make
− Gap
DENSO
NGK
− ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery
Open voltage at 20_C (68_F):
Charging rates
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
12.7 V Fully charged
12.3 V Half charged
11.9 V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off]
5 A max.
307
ENGINE
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5−M93 in Canada.
Use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating or Research
Octane Number lower than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
Gasolines containing detergent additives
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to
function improperly.
Also, this can increase
maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of
premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
308
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contain
detergent additives to avoid build−up of engine deposits.
For further details, ask your Lexus dealer or a local gasoline
retailer.
Quality gasoline
Automobile manufacturers in U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide. The WWFC consists of three
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
ENGINE
Cleaner burning gasoline
Gasoline quality
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
NOTICE
D Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
D If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
D Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Fuel tank capacity
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.)
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
309
ENGINE
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
310
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
ENGINE
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the
engine oil level” on page 312.
USED ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
D Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
D Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
D Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
311
ENGINE
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
" 1 Add oil
3 Too full
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the low level mark ( 4 ) and
the full level mark ( 5 ), it is O.K.
1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level spot.
After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.
NOTICE
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
312
2 O.K.
ENGINE
NOTICE
D Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
D Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low mark,
add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill
between the low level mark and the full level mark on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the
filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.)
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)
313
ENGINE
Engine oil selection
Oil identification marks
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W−30
SOIL11
62Z002
"API Service Symbol
"ILSAC Certification Mark
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE 10W−30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at the next
oil change.
D The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside
of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API
(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.
The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity
grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving”, shown
in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel−saving
capabilities.
D The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the
front of the container.
314
ENGINE
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine,
the “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range is available, which has
been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range.
" 1 Reservoir cap
2 Upper line
3 Lower line
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. If the level
is low, add ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper
corrosion protection of aluminum components.
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
Always use ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components. See information in the
next column.
315
ENGINE
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap
pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
We recommend to use 50% solution for your Lexus, to provide
protection down to about −35_C (−31_F). When it is extremely
cold, to provide protection down to about −50_C (−58_F), 60%
solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70% solution
for better coolant performance.
NOTICE
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
The engine cooling system is integral to maximizing
performance of your Lexus vehicle. In line with this, it is
strongly recommended that you use “Toyota Genuine Long
Life Coolant” for protecting the system, as it is an
ethylene−glycol based premium antifreeze coolant with
excellent corrosion protection properties that has been
specifically formulated for use in Lexus vehicles.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system. Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol type
coolant for a proper corrosion protection of your engine that
contains aluminum components. We have used “Toyota
Genuine Long Life Coolant” in your Lexus vehicle. In order to
avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.
In addition to preventing freezing and subsequent damage to
the engine, this type of coolant will also prevent corrosion.
Further supplemental inhibitors or additives are neither
needed nor recommended.
Read the coolant container for information on freeze
protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much
to mix with plain water (preferably demineralized water or
distilled water). The total capacity of the cooling system is
given on page 307.
316
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” range.
ENGINE
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
SPARK PLUGS
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, take your vehicle to Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the
radiator, condenser or intercooler when the engine is
hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped spark plugs.
NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and smooth
drivability.
317
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
319
322
323
324
326
326
329
330
331
332
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS
− AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
3.1 L (3.3 qt., 2.7 lmp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV*
*Change
automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T−IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring
optimum transaxle performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type T−IV” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the
automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
319
CHASSIS
− BRAKES
Pedal clearance
Fixed type
Adjustable type (in frontmost position)
70 mm (2.8 in.) Min. *1
59 mm (2.3 in.) Min. *1
Pedal free play
Fixed type
Adjustable type (in frontmost position)
1 − 6 mm (0.04 − 0.24 in.)
1 − 8 mm (0.04 − 0.31 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment
3 − 6 clicks *2
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running
*2: Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf)
− STEERING
320
Wheel free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III
CHASSIS
− TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
P215/60R16 94V
Front 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi)
Rear 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (99 mph), in countries where
such speeds are permitted by law, add 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi)
to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
16
6 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf)
NOTE:
For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel
precautions” on pages 324 through 331.
321
CHASSIS
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces. If fluid gets in your hands or eyes, flush them
with clean water immediately. If you still feel
uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.
NOTICE
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see−through
reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the tank.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear. So be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a
serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake
fluid up to the “MAX” line.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid
absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
322
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to
prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
CHASSIS
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID
" 1 If cold O.K.
4 If hot add
Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary,
add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60_C − 80_C or 140_F − 175_F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10_C − 30_C
or 50_F − 85_F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
2 If cold add
3 If hot O.K.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the
fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly,
if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the
level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic
transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift
up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir
cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose
connections for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
323
CHASSIS
NOTICE
CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
The recommended cold tire pressures, tire size and the
vehicle capacity weight are given on the label.
You should check the tire pressures every two weeks, or at
least once a month. And don’t forget the spare! The air
pressure for the spare tire should be adjusted according to the
conditions in the table on page 321.
Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of
driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
324
CHASSIS
CAUTION
The following instructions for checking tire pressure should be
observed:
Keep your tire pressure properly. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injuries.
D The pressure should be checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
since, you will get an accurate cold tire pressure reading.
Low tire pressure (underinflation) —
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
High tire pressure (overinflation) —
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear at the center of the tire tread
D A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
D Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the
tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that are
even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure after driving. It is
normal for the tire pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The
passengers and luggage weight should be located so that
the vehicle is balanced.
D Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve
caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and
cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new
ones put on as soon as possible.
325
CHASSIS
ROTATING TIRES
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
When to replace your tires
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus
recommends that you rotate your tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) However, the
most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary
according to your driving habits and road surface
conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure,
improper wheel alignment, out−of balance wheels, or severe
braking.
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction
of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction
when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry
place.
326
" 1 New tread
2 Tread wear indicator
3 Worn tread
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show.
The location of the tread wear indicators is shown by the
marks such as “TWI” or “∆” marks molded on the sidewall
of each tire.
The tires on your Lexus have built−in tread wear indicators to
help you know when the tires need replacement. When the
tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators
will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more
adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears
down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
CHASSIS
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep
enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal
damage, the tire should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with
a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
beyond repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by
a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom
been used.
This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future
use.
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with
regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality
grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may
have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades − All passenger car tires must
conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear − The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 − 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C − The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
327
CHASSIS
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C − The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
328
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use only the same size and
construction as originally installed and with the same or
greater load capacity.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect
handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground
clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias−ply tires on
your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
CHASSIS
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select the same size, construction
and load capacity as the original tires on your Lexus.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
Snow tire installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
D Snow tires should be inflated to the same pressure as
the original tires.
D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
Tire chain selection
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check the
local regulations before installing chains.
Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception
of radial cable chains or V−bar type chains.
Chain installation
Install the chains on the front tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the rear tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 − 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
329
CHASSIS
CAUTION
D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
D Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
D When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering the curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an
accident may occur.
330
REPLACING WHEELS
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or
heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace damaged wheels, a tire may slip off a wheel
or cause loss of handling control.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
CHASSIS
Wheel selection
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
D When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel
nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km
(1000 miles).
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
D If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
D When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
D Use only the Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for
your aluminum wheels.
CAUTION
D When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
331
CHASSIS
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
332
CHASSIS
333
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
335
341
344
344
347
348
349
350
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
− FUSES
− FUSE LOCATIONS
64E119
1 Engine compartment
64E092
" 1 2 Engine compartment
3 Driver’s side instrument panel
335
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64E101
2 Engine compartment
64E102
3 Driver’s side instrument panel
336
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
1
ABS NO.4
7.5
Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle skid control system,
traction control system, brake
assist system
25
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
25
Multiplex communication
system (power door lock
system, auto−door locking
system, wireless remote
control system)
2
3
4
5
A/F
DOOR1
TEL
AM2
CIRCUIT
5
No circuit
30
All components in “IGN” and
“IG2” fuses and starting system
6
EFI
20
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
7
ALT−S
5
Charging system
8
HEAD LH
UPR
10
Left−hand headlight (high
beam)
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
9
ETCS
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
10
HORN
10
Horns
11
IGN
15
Starting system
12
HEAD RH
UPR
10
Right−hand headlight (high
beam)
13
HAZ
15
Emergency flashers
14
D.C.C
30
All components in “ECU−B”,
“RAD NO.1” and “DOME” fuses
15
IG2
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, SRS
airbag system, front seat belt
pretensioners, cruise control
system
16
ST
5
Starting system
17
ADJ PDL
30
Power adjustable pedals
18
CDS
30
Electric cooling fan
337
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
19
ABS NO.2
40
Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle skid control system,
traction control system, brake
assist system
20
MAIN
40
All components in “HEAD LH
LWR”, “HEAD RH LWR”, “HEAD
LH UPR”, “HEAD RH UPR” and
“DRL” fuses
21
ABS NO.3
40
Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle skid control system,
traction control system, brake
assist system
22
HTR
50
Air conditioning system
23
RDI
30
Electric cooling fan
24
SPARE
5
Spare fuse
25
26
338
SPARE
ABS NO.1
CIRCUIT
10
Spare fuse
60
All components in “RDI FAN”,
“ABS NO.2”, “ABS NO.3”,
“CDS”, “HTR (50 A)” and “ADJ
PDL” fuses and anti−lock brake
system, vehicle skid control
system, traction control
system, brake assist system
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
27
ALT
120
All components in “DEF”, “PWR
NO.1”, “PWR NO.2”, “PWR
NO.3”, “PWR NO.4”, “STOP”,
“DOOR NO.2”, “OBD”, “PWR
SEAT”, “FUEL OPEN”, “FOG”,
“AMP”, “PANEL”, “TAIL”,
“AM1”, “CIG”, “POWER
POINT”, “RAD NO.2”,
“ECU−ACC”, “GAUGE1”,
“GAUGE2”, “ECU−IG”,
“WIPER”, “WASHER”, “HTR
(10 A)”, “SEAT HTR” and
“SUN−SHADE” fuses
28
SPARE
15
Spare fuse
29
A/C
10
Air conditioning system
30
DRL
5
Daytime running light system
31
HEAD RH
LWR
15
Right−hand headlight (low
beam)
32
HEAD LH
LWR
15
Left−hand headlight (low
beam) and front fog lights
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
33
34
35
36
FUSE
ECU−B
DOME
CIG
ECU−
ACC
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
10
Multiplex communication
system (power door lock
system, security system,
auto−door locking system,
automatic light control system,
headlight delay off system, tail
light auto cut system,
illuminated entry system,
daytime running light system,
wireless remote control
system) air conditioning
system, electronic modulated
suspension, driving position
memory system
7.5
Ignition switch light, interior
light, personal lights, foot
lights, door courtesy lights,
trunk light, vanity lights, garage
door opener, clock, outside
temperature gauge,
multi−information display
15
Cigarette lighter
5
Power rear view mirrors, clock,
multi−information display,
driving position memory
system
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
37
RAD NO.2
10
38
POWER
POINT
15
39
RAD NO.1
20
Car audio system, navigation
system
40
GAUGE1
10
Gauges and meters, clock,
outside temperature gauge,
multi−information display, shift
lock system
Car audio system, navigation
system
Power outlet
41
ECU−IG
10
SRS airbag system, power
windows, anti−lock brake
system, electronic modulated
suspension, driving position
memory system
42
WIPER
25
Windshield wipers
43
HTR
10
Air conditioning system
44
MIR
HTR
10
Outside rear view mirror
heaters
339
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
52
PWR NO.2
20
Front passenger’s door lock
system, front passenger’s
power window
Rear sunshade
53
OBD
7.5
On−board diagnosis system
Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror, compass, back−up
lights, automatic light control
system, automatic headlight
leveling system, cruise control
system, seat belt reminder
lights
54
SEAT
HTR
20
55
WASHER
15
56
FAN
RLY
10
Glove box light, console box
light, clock, outside
temperature gauge,
multi−information display,
instrument cluster lights,
instrument panel lights,
overdrive−off indicator light
57
STOP
15
58
FUEL
OPEN
5
59
DOOR
NO.2
25
Multiplex communication
system (power door lock
system, auto−door locking
system, wireless remote
control system)
60
AMP
25
Car audio system
61
PWR NO.3
20
Rear passenger’s power
window (right side)
45
AM1
5
Starting system
46
FOG
15
Front fog lights
47
SUN−
SHADE
15
48
49
340
FUSE
GAUGE2
PANEL
10
10
50
TAIL
10
Tail lights, parking lights,
license plate lights
51
PWR NO.4
20
Rear passenger’s power
window (left side)
CIRCUIT
Seat heaters
Windshield washer
Electric cooling fans
Stop lights, high mounted stoplight
Fuel filler door opener
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
62
PWR
SEAT
30
Power seats, driving position
memory system
63
PWR NO.1
30
Driver’s door lock system,
driver’s power window, electric
moon roof
64
DEF
40
Rear window defogger
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
D Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
D Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
D Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
D Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
D If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water immediately and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a
sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office.
341
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
D If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
Checking battery exterior
D If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
D If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large
quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
" 1 Terminals
2 Hold−down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold−down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts − but do
not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold−down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
342
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Checking battery condition
Checking by indicator
D Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
D When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
D Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
D Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these
cases, you should normalize the moon roof. To normalize the
moon roof, see page 92.
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1
BLUE − Good condition
2
WHITE − Charging necessary. Have the battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.
3
RED − Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
343
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
"Engine compartment
D Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
D Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
"Engine compartment
344
1 Pull−out tool 2 Spare fuses
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
"Driver’s side instrument panel
1. Turn the ignition switch off and remove the auxiliary
box.
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull−out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The
auxiliary box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
345
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
"Good
"Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the “RAD NO.1”, “RAD NO.2” or “POWER POINT” fuse,
which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its
amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower
than, but as close as possible to, the amperage. If the
amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out
again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute
to its original clips.
346
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
"Engine compartment
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire − even for
a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
"Driver’s side instrument panel
347
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
D Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
D Do not fill washer fluid over the “NORMAL” level.
348
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM
(vehicles with discharge headlight)
" 1 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1
2 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2
Adjusting the vertical aiming
1. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 in either
direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. At this time, keep
the turning direction and number of turns in mind.
Before checking the headlight aim:
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in
a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
349
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
The illustration on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION
D To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
2. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 the same
number of turns and in the same direction at step 1 using a
Phillips−head screwdriver.
D Vehicles with discharge headlight—Do not
disassemble, repair or take apart the low beam
headlight bulbs, connector, power supply circuits
and rotated components. Or you may be injured by
electric shocks. Call your dealer when the headlights
fail to work or have to be replaced or disposed of.
D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
350
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
LIGHT LOCATION
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
Headlights (high beam)
9005
60
A
2
Headlights (low beam)
Discharge bulb
Halogen bulb
−−−
−−−
35
55
B
C
Parking lights
Front side marker lights
Fog lights
Front turn signal lights
−−−
194
−−−
−−−
5
3.8
55
21
E
E
D
E
3
4
5
6
351
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Light Bulbs
352
Bulb No.
W
Type
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
7
High mounted stoplight
7440
21
E
14
Vanity lights
−−−
5
G
8
Rear turn signal lights
−−−
21
E
15
Interior light
−−−
8
G
9
Rear side marker lights
−−−
5
E
16
Door courtesy lights
168
5
E
10
Stop/tail lights
7443
21/5
E
17
Glove box light
−−−
1.4
E
11
Back−up lights
921
18
E
18
Personal lights
−−−
8
F
12
License plate lights
−−−
5
E
13
Tail lights
168
5
E
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Light Bulbs
19
Trunk light
Bulb No.
W
Type
−−−
3
G
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: D2R discharge bulbs
C: H7 halogen bulbs
D: H3 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs
F: Single end bulbs
G: Double end bulbs
353
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
355
356
357
359
BODY
SPECIFICATIONS
− DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Overall length
4855 mm (191.1 in.)
Overall width
1810 mm (71.3 in.)
Overall height
1455 mm (57.3 in.)*
Wheelbase
2720 mm (107.1 in.)
Tread
− Front
− Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)
1545 mm (60.8 in.)
1535 mm (60.4 in.)
410 kg (900 lb.)
*: Unladen vehicle
− FUEL TANK
Capacity
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.)
355
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long−term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard−to−reach areas under the vehicle.
D Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
D The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
D High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
D Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
D Components of the vehicle which are prevented from
quick−drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed
to high temperature.
356
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
D If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
D High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing them. The lower edge of
doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes
which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped
water in these areas can cause corrosion.
D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See “Washing and waxing” on page 357 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
BODY
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it in covered with water or snow, your garage may
be so damp it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is
heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon
as possible.
D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
D When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass
of an insect
D When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke,
soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substance
D When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand−washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot
to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep
it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub
hard − let the soap and water remove the dirt.
357
BODY
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substances splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard − you might scratch the
paint.
Automatic car wash
CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents
while the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do
not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side
molding faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
3. Rinse thoroughly − dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
358
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some type of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water
well, apply wax.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing,
even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
BODY
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure that the nozzles do
not become blocked when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle
serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with
a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CAUTION
D Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the
floor. This may prevent the side airbags from
activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
D Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow
water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get into audio
components or other electrical components above or
under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a
malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Leather Interior
The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to a leather
product, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or
scratched originally.
To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it
periodically twice a year.
Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:
1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.
2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
traces of detergent with it.
3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow
the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet
may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.
359
BODY
NOTICE
D Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the
treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove
dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
D If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
D Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a
mild soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming−type cleaners are also
available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
D Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
NOTICE
D Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
D Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
D The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
D Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
360
Synthetic Leather Areas (Dash)
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water − the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
BODY
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water
or with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts
for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio,
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and
Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
D Use a good foam−type shampoo to clean the carpets.
D Do not use dye or bleach on the belts − it may weaken
them.
NOTICE
D The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
D Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
D Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper
control sensor when cleaning the inside of the
windshield.
D If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
D If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
D Do not use the belts until they become dry.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
361
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
362
KEYS AND DOORS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
363